@@ -1,50 +1,34 @@
1−% Pandoc User's Guide
2−% John MacFarlane
3−% March 26, 2017
1+---
2+title: Pandoc User's Guide
3+author: John MacFarlane
4+date: June 20, 2021
5+---
46
5−Synopsis
6−========
7+# Synopsis
78
89`pandoc` [*options*] [*input-file*]...
910
10−Description
11−===========
11+# Description
1212
1313Pandoc is a [Haskell] library for converting from one markup format to
14−another, and a command-line tool that uses this library. It can read
15−[Markdown], [CommonMark], [PHP Markdown Extra], [GitHub-Flavored
16−Markdown], [MultiMarkdown], and (subsets of) [Textile],
17−[reStructuredText], [HTML], [LaTeX], [MediaWiki markup], [TWiki markup],
18−[Haddock markup], [OPML], [Emacs Org mode], [DocBook], [Muse], [txt2tags],
19−[Vimwiki], [EPUB], [ODT], and [Word docx]; and it can
20−write plain text, [Markdown], [CommonMark], [PHP Markdown
21−Extra], [GitHub-Flavored Markdown], [MultiMarkdown],
22−[reStructuredText], [XHTML], [HTML5], [LaTeX] \(including
23−[`beamer`] slide shows\), [ConTeXt], [RTF], [OPML], [DocBook],
24−[OpenDocument], [ODT], [Word docx], [GNU Texinfo], [MediaWiki
25−markup], [DokuWiki markup], [ZimWiki markup], [Haddock markup],
26−[EPUB] \(v2 or v3\), [FictionBook2], [Textile], [groff man],
27−[groff ms], [Emacs Org mode], [AsciiDoc], [InDesign ICML], [TEI
28−Simple], [Muse] and [Slidy], [Slideous], [DZSlides], [reveal.js]
29−or [S5] HTML slide shows. It can also produce [PDF] output on
30−systems where LaTeX, ConTeXt, `pdfroff`, or `wkhtmltopdf` is
31−installed.
32−
33−Pandoc's enhanced version of Markdown includes syntax for [footnotes],
34−[tables], flexible [ordered lists], [definition lists], [fenced code
35−blocks], [superscripts and subscripts], [strikeout], [metadata blocks],
36−automatic tables of contents, embedded LaTeX [math], [citations], and
37−[Markdown inside HTML block elements][Extension:
38−`markdown_in_html_blocks`]. (These enhancements, described further under
39−[Pandoc's Markdown], can be disabled using the `markdown_strict` input
40−or output format.)
41−
42−In contrast to most existing tools for converting Markdown to HTML, which
43−use regex substitutions, pandoc has a modular design: it consists of a
44−set of readers, which parse text in a given format and produce a native
45−representation of the document, and a set of writers, which convert
14+another, and a command-line tool that uses this library.
15+
16+Pandoc can convert between numerous markup and word processing formats,
17+including, but not limited to, various flavors of [Markdown], [HTML],
18+[LaTeX] and [Word docx]. For the full lists of input and output formats,
19+see the `--from` and `--to` [options below][General options].
20+Pandoc can also produce [PDF] output: see [creating a PDF], below.
21+
22+Pandoc's enhanced version of Markdown includes syntax for [tables],
23+[definition lists], [metadata blocks], [footnotes], [citations], [math],
24+and much more. See below under [Pandoc's Markdown].
25+
26+Pandoc has a modular design: it consists of a set of readers, which parse
27+text in a given format and produce a native representation of the document
28+(an _abstract syntax tree_ or AST), and a set of writers, which convert
4629this native representation into a target format. Thus, adding an input
47−or output format requires only adding a reader or writer.
30+or output format requires only adding a reader or writer. Users can also
31+run custom [pandoc filters] to modify the intermediate AST.
4832
4933Because pandoc's intermediate representation of a document is less
5034expressive than many of the formats it converts between, one should
@@ -56,92 +40,33 @@ model. While conversions from pandoc's Markdown to all formats aspire
5640to be perfect, conversions from formats more expressive than pandoc's
5741Markdown can be expected to be lossy.
5842
59−[Markdown]: http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/
60−[CommonMark]: http://commonmark.org
61−[PHP Markdown Extra]: https://michelf.ca/projects/php-markdown/extra/
62−[GitHub-Flavored Markdown]: https://help.github.com/articles/github-flavored-markdown/
63−[MultiMarkdown]: http://fletcherpenney.net/multimarkdown/
64−[reStructuredText]: http://docutils.sourceforge.net/docs/ref/rst/introduction.html
65−[S5]: http://meyerweb.com/eric/tools/s5/
66−[Slidy]: http://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy/
67−[Slideous]: http://goessner.net/articles/slideous/
68−[HTML]: http://www.w3.org/html/
69−[HTML5]: http://www.w3.org/TR/html5/
70−[polyglot markup]: https://www.w3.org/TR/html-polyglot/
71−[XHTML]: http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/
72−[LaTeX]: http://latex-project.org
73−[`beamer`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer
74−[Beamer User's Guide]: http://ctan.math.utah.edu/ctan/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf
75−[ConTeXt]: http://www.contextgarden.net/
76−[RTF]: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rich_Text_Format
77−[DocBook]: http://docbook.org
78−[txt2tags]: http://txt2tags.org
79−[EPUB]: http://idpf.org/epub
80−[OPML]: http://dev.opml.org/spec2.html
81−[OpenDocument]: http://opendocument.xml.org
82−[ODT]: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenDocument
83−[Textile]: http://redcloth.org/textile
84−[MediaWiki markup]: https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Formatting
85−[DokuWiki markup]: https://www.dokuwiki.org/dokuwiki
86−[ZimWiki markup]: http://zim-wiki.org/manual/Help/Wiki_Syntax.html
87−[TWiki markup]: http://twiki.org/cgi-bin/view/TWiki/TextFormattingRules
88−[Haddock markup]: https://www.haskell.org/haddock/doc/html/ch03s08.html
89−[groff man]: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man7/groff_man.7.html
90−[groff ms]: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man7/groff_ms.7.html
91−[Haskell]: https://www.haskell.org
92−[GNU Texinfo]: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
93−[Emacs Org mode]: http://orgmode.org
94−[AsciiDoc]: http://www.methods.co.nz/asciidoc/
95−[DZSlides]: http://paulrouget.com/dzslides/
96−[Word docx]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Office_Open_XML
97−[PDF]: https://www.adobe.com/pdf/
98−[reveal.js]: http://lab.hakim.se/reveal-js/
99−[FictionBook2]: http://www.fictionbook.org/index.php/Eng:XML_Schema_Fictionbook_2.1
100−[InDesign ICML]: https://www.adobe.com/content/dam/Adobe/en/devnet/indesign/cs55-docs/IDML/idml-specification.pdf
101−[TEI Simple]: https://github.com/TEIC/TEI-Simple
102−[Muse]: https://amusewiki.org/library/manual
103−[Vimwiki]: https://vimwiki.github.io
104−
105−Using `pandoc`
106−--------------
43+## Using pandoc
10744
108−If no *input-file* is specified, input is read from *stdin*.
109−Otherwise, the *input-files* are concatenated (with a blank
110−line between each) and used as input. Output goes to *stdout* by
111−default (though output to *stdout* is disabled for the `odt`, `docx`,
112−`epub2`, and `epub3` output formats). For output to a file, use the
113−`-o` option:
45+If no *input-files* are specified, input is read from *stdin*.
46+Output goes to *stdout* by default. For output to a file,
47+use the `-o` option:
11448
11549 pandoc -o output.html input.txt
11650
117−By default, pandoc produces a document fragment, not a standalone
118−document with a proper header and footer. To produce a standalone
119−document, use the `-s` or `--standalone` flag:
51+By default, pandoc produces a document fragment. To produce a standalone
52+document (e.g. a valid HTML file including `<head>` and `<body>`),
53+use the `-s` or `--standalone` flag:
12054
12155 pandoc -s -o output.html input.txt
12256
12357For more information on how standalone documents are produced, see
124−[Templates], below.
125−
126−Instead of a file, an absolute URI may be given. In this case
127−pandoc will fetch the content using HTTP:
128−
129− pandoc -f html -t markdown http://www.fsf.org
130−
131−It is possible to supply a custom User-Agent string when requesting a
132−document from a URL, by setting an environment variable:
133−
134− USER_AGENT="Mozilla/5.0" pandoc -f html -t markdown http://www.fsf.org
58+[Templates] below.
13559
13660If multiple input files are given, `pandoc` will concatenate them all (with
137−blank lines between them) before parsing. This feature is disabled for
138− binary input formats such as `EPUB`, `odt`, and `docx`.
61+blank lines between them) before parsing. (Use `--file-scope` to parse files
62+individually.)
63+
64+## Specifying formats
13965
14066The format of the input and output can be specified explicitly using
14167command-line options. The input format can be specified using the
142−`-r/--read` or `-f/--from` options, the output format using the
143−`-w/--write` or `-t/--to` options. Thus, to convert `hello.txt` from
144−Markdown to LaTeX, you could type:
68+`-f/--from` option, the output format using the `-t/--to` option.
69+Thus, to convert `hello.txt` from Markdown to LaTeX, you could type:
14570
14671 pandoc -f markdown -t latex hello.txt
14772
@@ -149,14 +74,15 @@ To convert `hello.html` from HTML to Markdown:
14974
15075 pandoc -f html -t markdown hello.html
15176
152−Supported output formats are listed below under the `-t/--to` option.
153−Supported input formats are listed below under the `-f/--from` option. Note
154−that the `rst`, `textile`, `latex`, and `html` readers are not complete;
155−there are some constructs that they do not parse.
77+Supported input and output formats are listed below under [Options]
78+(see `-f` for input formats and `-t` for output formats). You
79+can also use `pandoc --list-input-formats` and
80+`pandoc --list-output-formats` to print lists of supported
81+formats.
15682
15783If the input or output format is not specified explicitly, `pandoc`
158−will attempt to guess it from the extensions of
159−the input and output filenames. Thus, for example,
84+will attempt to guess it from the extensions of the filenames.
85+Thus, for example,
16086
16187 pandoc -o hello.tex hello.txt
16288
@@ -165,7 +91,9 @@ is specified (so that output goes to *stdout*), or if the output file's
16591extension is unknown, the output format will default to HTML.
16692If no input file is specified (so that input comes from *stdin*), or
16793if the input files' extensions are unknown, the input format will
168−be assumed to be Markdown unless explicitly specified.
94+be assumed to be Markdown.
95+
96+## Character encoding
16997
17098Pandoc uses the UTF-8 character encoding for both input and output.
17199If your local character encoding is not UTF-8, you
@@ -178,185 +106,295 @@ RTF, OPML, DocBook, and Texinfo), information about
178106the character encoding is included in the document header, which
179107will only be included if you use the `-s/--standalone` option.
180108
181−[`iconv`]: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/
109+[`iconv`]: https://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/
182110
183−Creating a PDF
184−--------------
111+## Creating a PDF
185112
186−To produce a PDF, specify an output file with a `.pdf` extension.
187−By default, pandoc will use LaTeX to convert it to PDF:
113+To produce a PDF, specify an output file with a `.pdf` extension:
188114
189115 pandoc test.txt -o test.pdf
190116
191−Production of a PDF requires that a LaTeX engine be installed (see
192−`--latex-engine`, below), and assumes that the following LaTeX packages
193−are available: [`amsfonts`], [`amsmath`], [`lm`], [`unicode-math`],
194−[`ifxetex`], [`ifluatex`], [`eurosym`], [`listings`] (if the
117+By default, pandoc will use LaTeX to create the PDF, which requires
118+that a LaTeX engine be installed (see `--pdf-engine` below).
119+Alternatively, pandoc can use ConTeXt, roff ms, or HTML as an
120+intermediate format. To do this, specify an output file with a
121+`.pdf` extension, as before, but add the `--pdf-engine` option
122+or `-t context`, `-t html`, or `-t ms` to the command line.
123+The tool used to generate the PDF from the intermediate format
124+may be specified using `--pdf-engine`.
125+
126+You can control the PDF style using variables, depending on
127+the intermediate format used: see [variables for LaTeX],
128+[variables for ConTeXt], [variables for `wkhtmltopdf`],
129+[variables for ms]. When HTML is used as an intermediate
130+format, the output can be styled using `--css`.
131+
132+To debug the PDF creation, it can be useful to look at the intermediate
133+representation: instead of `-o test.pdf`, use for example `-s -o test.tex`
134+to output the generated LaTeX. You can then test it with `pdflatex test.tex`.
135+
136+When using LaTeX, the following packages need to be available
137+(they are included with all recent versions of [TeX Live]):
138+[`amsfonts`], [`amsmath`], [`lm`], [`unicode-math`],
139+[`iftex`], [`listings`] (if the
195140`--listings` option is used), [`fancyvrb`], [`longtable`],
196−[`booktabs`], [`graphicx`] and [`grffile`] (if the document
197−contains images), [`hyperref`], [`ulem`], [`geometry`] (with the
198−`geometry` variable set), [`setspace`] (with `linestretch`), and
141+[`booktabs`], [`graphicx`] (if the document
142+contains images), [`hyperref`], [`xcolor`],
143+[`ulem`], [`geometry`] (with the `geometry` variable set),
144+[`setspace`] (with `linestretch`), and
199145[`babel`] (with `lang`). The use of `xelatex` or `lualatex` as
200−the LaTeX engine requires [`fontspec`]. `xelatex` uses
201−[`polyglossia`] (with `lang`), [`xecjk`], and [`bidi`] (with the
202−`dir` variable set). If the `mathspec` variable is set,
203−`xelatex` will use [`mathspec`] instead of [`unicode-math`].
204−The [`upquote`] and [`microtype`] packages are used if
205−available, and [`csquotes`] will be used for [smart punctuation]
206−if added to the template or included in any header file. The
207−[`natbib`], [`biblatex`], [`bibtex`], and [`biber`] packages can
208−optionally be used for [citation rendering]. These are included
209−with all recent versions of [TeX Live].
210−
211−Alternatively, pandoc can use ConTeXt, `wkhtmltopdf`, or
212−`pdfroff` to create a PDF. To do this, specify an output file
213−with a `.pdf` extension, as before, but add `-t context`, `-t
214−html5`, or `-t ms` to the command line.
215−
216−PDF output can be controlled using [variables for LaTeX] (if
217−LaTeX is used) and [variables for ConTeXt] (if ConTeXt is used).
218−If `wkhtmltopdf` is used, then the variables `margin-left`,
219−`margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`, and `papersize`
220−will affect the output, as will `--css`.
221−
146+the PDF engine requires [`fontspec`]. `lualatex` uses
147+[`selnolig`]. `xelatex` uses [`polyglossia`] (with `lang`),
148+[`xecjk`], and [`bidi`] (with the `dir` variable set). If the
149+`mathspec` variable is set, `xelatex` will use [`mathspec`]
150+instead of [`unicode-math`]. The [`upquote`] and [`microtype`]
151+packages are used if available, and [`csquotes`] will be used
152+for [typography] if the `csquotes` variable or metadata field is
153+set to a true value. The [`natbib`], [`biblatex`], [`bibtex`],
154+and [`biber`] packages can optionally be used for [citation
155+rendering]. The following packages will be used to improve
156+output quality if present, but pandoc does not require them to
157+be present: [`upquote`] (for straight quotes in verbatim
158+environments), [`microtype`] (for better spacing adjustments),
159+[`parskip`] (for better inter-paragraph spaces), [`xurl`] (for
160+better line breaks in URLs), [`bookmark`] (for better PDF
161+bookmarks), and [`footnotehyper`] or [`footnote`] (to allow
162+footnotes in tables).
163+
164+[TeX Live]: https://www.tug.org/texlive/
222165[`amsfonts`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/amsfonts
223166[`amsmath`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/amsmath
224−[`lm`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/lm
225−[`ifxetex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/ifxetex
226−[`ifluatex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/ifluatex
227−[`eurosym`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/eurosym
228−[`listings`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/listings
229−[`fancyvrb`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/fancyvrb
230−[`longtable`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/longtable
167+[`babel`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/babel
168+[`biber`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biber
169+[`biblatex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biblatex
170+[`bibtex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bibtex
171+[`bidi`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bidi
172+[`bookmark`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bookmark
231173[`booktabs`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs
174+[`csquotes`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/csquotes
175+[`fancyvrb`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/fancyvrb
176+[`fontspec`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/fontspec
177+[`footnote`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/footnote
178+[`footnotehyper`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/footnotehyper
179+[`geometry`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/geometry
232180[`graphicx`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/graphicx
233181[`grffile`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/grffile
234−[`geometry`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/geometry
235−[`setspace`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/setspace
236−[`xecjk`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/xecjk
237182[`hyperref`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
238−[`ulem`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/ulem
239−[`babel`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/babel
240−[`bidi`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bidi
183+[`iftex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/iftex
184+[`listings`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/listings
185+[`lm`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/lm
186+[`longtable`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/longtable
241187[`mathspec`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/mathspec
242−[`unicode-math`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/unicode-math
243−[`polyglossia`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/polyglossia
244−[`fontspec`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/fontspec
245−[`upquote`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/upquote
246188[`microtype`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/microtype
247−[`csquotes`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/csquotes
248189[`natbib`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/natbib
249−[`biblatex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biblatex
250−[`bibtex`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bibtex
251−[`biber`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biber
252−[TeX Live]: http://www.tug.org/texlive/
190+[`parskip`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/parskip
191+[`polyglossia`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/polyglossia
192+[`prince`]: https://www.princexml.com/
193+[`setspace`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/setspace
194+[`ulem`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/ulem
195+[`unicode-math`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/unicode-math
196+[`upquote`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/upquote
197+[`weasyprint`]: https://weasyprint.org
198+[`wkhtmltopdf`]: https://wkhtmltopdf.org
199+[`xcolor`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/xcolor
200+[`xecjk`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/xecjk
201+[`xurl`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/xurl
202+[`selnolig`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/selnolig
203+
204+
205+
206+## Reading from the Web
207+
208+Instead of an input file, an absolute URI may be given. In this case
209+pandoc will fetch the content using HTTP:
210+
211+ pandoc -f html -t markdown https://www.fsf.org
253212
254−Options
255−=======
213+It is possible to supply a custom User-Agent string or other
214+header when requesting a document from a URL:
256215
257−General options
258−---------------
216+ pandoc -f html -t markdown --request-header User-Agent:"Mozilla/5.0" \
217+ https://www.fsf.org
218+
219+# Options
220+
221+## General options {.options}
259222
260223`-f` *FORMAT*, `-r` *FORMAT*, `--from=`*FORMAT*, `--read=`*FORMAT*
261224
262−: Specify input format. *FORMAT* can be `native` (native Haskell),
263− `json` (JSON version of native AST), `markdown` (pandoc's
264− extended Markdown), `markdown_strict` (original unextended
265− Markdown), `markdown_phpextra` (PHP Markdown Extra), `markdown_github`
266− (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), `markdown_mmd` (MultiMarkdown),
267− `commonmark` (CommonMark Markdown), `textile` (Textile), `rst`
268− (reStructuredText), `html` (HTML), `docbook` (DocBook), `t2t`
269− (txt2tags), `docx` (docx), `odt` (ODT), `epub` (EPUB), `opml` (OPML),
270− `org` (Emacs Org mode), `mediawiki` (MediaWiki markup), `twiki` (TWiki
271− markup), `haddock` (Haddock markup), or `latex` (LaTeX). If
272− `+lhs` is appended to `markdown`, `rst`, `latex`, or `html`, the
273− input will be treated as literate Haskell source: see [Literate
274− Haskell support], below. Markdown
275− syntax extensions can be individually enabled or disabled by
276− appending `+EXTENSION` or `-EXTENSION` to the format name. So, for
277− example, `markdown_strict+footnotes+definition_lists` is strict
278− Markdown with footnotes and definition lists enabled, and
279− `markdown-pipe_tables+hard_line_breaks` is pandoc's Markdown
280− without pipe tables and with hard line breaks. See [Pandoc's
281− Markdown], below, for a list of extensions and
225+: Specify input format. *FORMAT* can be:
226+
227+ ::: {#input-formats}
228+ - `bibtex` ([BibTeX] bibliography)
229+ - `biblatex` ([BibLaTeX] bibliography)
230+ - `commonmark` ([CommonMark] Markdown)
231+ - `commonmark_x` ([CommonMark] Markdown with extensions)
232+ - `creole` ([Creole 1.0])
233+ - `csljson` ([CSL JSON] bibliography)
234+ - `csv` ([CSV] table)
235+ - `docbook` ([DocBook])
236+ - `docx` ([Word docx])
237+ - `dokuwiki` ([DokuWiki markup])
238+ - `epub` ([EPUB])
239+ - `fb2` ([FictionBook2] e-book)
240+ - `gfm` ([GitHub-Flavored Markdown]),
241+ or the deprecated and less accurate `markdown_github`;
242+ use [`markdown_github`](#markdown-variants) only
243+ if you need extensions not supported in [`gfm`](#markdown-variants).
244+ - `haddock` ([Haddock markup])
245+ - `html` ([HTML])
246+ - `ipynb` ([Jupyter notebook])
247+ - `jats` ([JATS] XML)
248+ - `jira` ([Jira]/Confluence wiki markup)
249+ - `json` (JSON version of native AST)
250+ - `latex` ([LaTeX])
251+ - `markdown` ([Pandoc's Markdown])
252+ - `markdown_mmd` ([MultiMarkdown])
253+ - `markdown_phpextra` ([PHP Markdown Extra])
254+ - `markdown_strict` (original unextended [Markdown])
255+ - `mediawiki` ([MediaWiki markup])
256+ - `man` ([roff man])
257+ - `muse` ([Muse])
258+ - `native` (native Haskell)
259+ - `odt` ([ODT])
260+ - `opml` ([OPML])
261+ - `org` ([Emacs Org mode])
262+ - `rst` ([reStructuredText])
263+ - `t2t` ([txt2tags])
264+ - `textile` ([Textile])
265+ - `tikiwiki` ([TikiWiki markup])
266+ - `twiki` ([TWiki markup])
267+ - `vimwiki` ([Vimwiki])
268+ :::
269+
270+ Extensions can be individually enabled or disabled by
271+ appending `+EXTENSION` or `-EXTENSION` to the format name.
272+ See [Extensions] below, for a list of extensions and
282273 their names. See `--list-input-formats` and `--list-extensions`,
283274 below.
284275
285276`-t` *FORMAT*, `-w` *FORMAT*, `--to=`*FORMAT*, `--write=`*FORMAT*
286277
287−: Specify output format. *FORMAT* can be `native` (native Haskell),
288− `json` (JSON version of native AST), `plain` (plain text),
289− `markdown` (pandoc's extended Markdown), `markdown_strict`
290− (original unextended Markdown), `markdown_phpextra` (PHP Markdown
291− Extra), `markdown_github` (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), `markdown_mmd`
292− (MultiMarkdown), `commonmark` (CommonMark Markdown), `rst`
293− (reStructuredText), `html4` (XHTML 1.0 Transitional), `html`
294− or `html5` (HTML5/XHTML [polyglot markup]), `latex`
295− (LaTeX), `beamer` (LaTeX beamer slide show), `context` (ConTeXt),
296− `man` (groff man), `mediawiki` (MediaWiki markup),
297− `dokuwiki` (DokuWiki markup), `zimwiki` (ZimWiki markup),
298− `textile` (Textile), `org` (Emacs Org mode), `texinfo` (GNU Texinfo),
299− `opml` (OPML), `docbook` or `docbook4` (DocBook 4), `docbook5`
300− (DocBook 5), `jats` (JATS XML), `opendocument` (OpenDocument),
301− `odt` (OpenOffice text document), `docx` (Word docx), `haddock`
302− (Haddock markup), `rtf` (rich text format), `epub2` (EPUB v2 book),
303− `epub` or `epub3` (EPUB v3), `fb2` (FictionBook2 e-book),
304− `asciidoc` (AsciiDoc), `icml` (InDesign ICML), `tei` (TEI
305− Simple), `slidy` (Slidy HTML and JavaScript slide show),
306− `slideous` (Slideous HTML and JavaScript slide show),
307− `dzslides` (DZSlides HTML5 + JavaScript slide show),
308− `revealjs` (reveal.js HTML5 + JavaScript slide show), `s5`
309− (S5 HTML and JavaScript slide show), or the path of a custom
310− lua writer (see [Custom writers], below). Note that `odt`,
311− `epub`, and `epub3` output will not be directed to *stdout*;
312− an output filename must be specified using the `-o/--output`
313− option. If `+lhs` is appended to `markdown`, `rst`, `latex`,
314− `beamer`, `html4`, or `html5`, the output will be rendered as
315− literate Haskell source: see [Literate Haskell support],
316− below. Markdown syntax extensions can be individually
317− enabled or disabled by appending `+EXTENSION` or
318− `-EXTENSION` to the format name, as described above under `-f`.
319− See `--list-output-formats` and `--list-extensions`, below.
278+: Specify output format. *FORMAT* can be:
279+
280+ ::: {#output-formats}
281+ - `asciidoc` ([AsciiDoc]) or `asciidoctor` ([AsciiDoctor])
282+ - `beamer` ([LaTeX beamer][`beamer`] slide show)
283+ - `bibtex` ([BibTeX] bibliography)
284+ - `biblatex` ([BibLaTeX] bibliography)
285+ - `commonmark` ([CommonMark] Markdown)
286+ - `commonmark_x` ([CommonMark] Markdown with extensions)
287+ - `context` ([ConTeXt])
288+ - `csljson` ([CSL JSON] bibliography)
289+ - `docbook` or `docbook4` ([DocBook] 4)
290+ - `docbook5` (DocBook 5)
291+ - `docx` ([Word docx])
292+ - `dokuwiki` ([DokuWiki markup])
293+ - `epub` or `epub3` ([EPUB] v3 book)
294+ - `epub2` (EPUB v2)
295+ - `fb2` ([FictionBook2] e-book)
296+ - `gfm` ([GitHub-Flavored Markdown]),
297+ or the deprecated and less accurate `markdown_github`;
298+ use [`markdown_github`](#markdown-variants) only
299+ if you need extensions not supported in [`gfm`](#markdown-variants).
300+ - `haddock` ([Haddock markup])
301+ - `html` or `html5` ([HTML], i.e. [HTML5]/XHTML [polyglot markup])
302+ - `html4` ([XHTML] 1.0 Transitional)
303+ - `icml` ([InDesign ICML])
304+ - `ipynb` ([Jupyter notebook])
305+ - `jats_archiving` ([JATS] XML, Archiving and Interchange Tag Set)
306+ - `jats_articleauthoring` ([JATS] XML, Article Authoring Tag Set)
307+ - `jats_publishing` ([JATS] XML, Journal Publishing Tag Set)
308+ - `jats` (alias for `jats_archiving`)
309+ - `jira` ([Jira]/Confluence wiki markup)
310+ - `json` (JSON version of native AST)
311+ - `latex` ([LaTeX])
312+ - `man` ([roff man])
313+ - `markdown` ([Pandoc's Markdown])
314+ - `markdown_mmd` ([MultiMarkdown])
315+ - `markdown_phpextra` ([PHP Markdown Extra])
316+ - `markdown_strict` (original unextended [Markdown])
317+ - `mediawiki` ([MediaWiki markup])
318+ - `ms` ([roff ms])
319+ - `muse` ([Muse]),
320+ - `native` (native Haskell),
321+ - `odt` ([OpenOffice text document][ODT])
322+ - `opml` ([OPML])
323+ - `opendocument` ([OpenDocument])
324+ - `org` ([Emacs Org mode])
325+ - `pdf` ([PDF])
326+ - `plain` (plain text),
327+ - `pptx` ([PowerPoint] slide show)
328+ - `rst` ([reStructuredText])
329+ - `rtf` ([Rich Text Format])
330+ - `texinfo` ([GNU Texinfo])
331+ - `textile` ([Textile])
332+ - `slideous` ([Slideous] HTML and JavaScript slide show)
333+ - `slidy` ([Slidy] HTML and JavaScript slide show)
334+ - `dzslides` ([DZSlides] HTML5 + JavaScript slide show),
335+ - `revealjs` ([reveal.js] HTML5 + JavaScript slide show)
336+ - `s5` ([S5] HTML and JavaScript slide show)
337+ - `tei` ([TEI Simple])
338+ - `xwiki` ([XWiki markup])
339+ - `zimwiki` ([ZimWiki markup])
340+ - the path of a custom Lua writer, see [Custom writers] below
341+ :::
342+
343+ Note that `odt`, `docx`, `epub`, and `pdf` output will not be directed
344+ to *stdout* unless forced with `-o -`.
345+
346+ Extensions can be individually enabled or
347+ disabled by appending `+EXTENSION` or `-EXTENSION` to the format
348+ name. See [Extensions] below, for a list of extensions and their
349+ names. See `--list-output-formats` and `--list-extensions`, below.
320350
321351`-o` *FILE*, `--output=`*FILE*
322352
323353: Write output to *FILE* instead of *stdout*. If *FILE* is
324− `-`, output will go to *stdout*. (Exception: if the output
325− format is `odt`, `docx`, `epub`, or `epub3`, output to stdout is disabled.)
354+ `-`, output will go to *stdout*, even if a non-textual format
355+ (`docx`, `odt`, `epub2`, `epub3`) is specified.
326356
327357`--data-dir=`*DIRECTORY*
328358
329359: Specify the user data directory to search for pandoc data files.
330360 If this option is not specified, the default user data directory
331− will be used. This is, in Unix:
332−
333− $HOME/.pandoc
334−
335− in Windows XP:
336−
337− C:\Documents And Settings\USERNAME\Application Data\pandoc
338−
339− and in Windows Vista or later:
340−
341− C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\pandoc
342−
361+ will be used. On \*nix and macOS systems this will be the `pandoc`
362+ subdirectory of the XDG data directory (by default,
363+ `$HOME/.local/share`, overridable by setting the `XDG_DATA_HOME`
364+ environment variable). If that directory does not exist and
365+ `$HOME/.pandoc` exists, it will be used (for backwards compatibility).
366+ On Windows the default user data directory is
367+ `C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\pandoc`.
343368 You can find the default user data directory on your system by
344369 looking at the output of `pandoc --version`.
345− A `reference.odt`, `reference.docx`, `epub.css`, `templates`,
346− `slidy`, `slideous`, or `s5` directory
347− placed in this directory will override pandoc's normal defaults.
370+ Data files placed in this directory (for example, `reference.odt`,
371+ `reference.docx`, `epub.css`, `templates`) will override
372+ pandoc's normal defaults.
373+
374+`-d` *FILE*, `--defaults=`*FILE*
375+
376+: Specify a set of default option settings. *FILE* is a YAML
377+ file whose fields correspond to command-line option
378+ settings. All options for document conversion, including input
379+ and output files, can be set using a defaults file. The file will
380+ be searched for first in the working directory, and then in
381+ the `defaults` subdirectory of the user data directory
382+ (see `--data-dir`). The `.yaml` extension may be omitted.
383+ See the section [Default files] for more information on the
384+ file format. Settings from the defaults file may be
385+ overridden or extended by subsequent options on the command
386+ line.
348387
349388`--bash-completion`
350389
351390: Generate a bash completion script. To enable bash completion
352391 with pandoc, add this to your `.bashrc`:
353392
354− eval "$(pandoc --bash-completion)"
393+ eval "$(pandoc --bash-completion)"
355394
356395`--verbose`
357396
358−: Give verbose debugging output. Currently this only has an effect
359− with PDF output.
397+: Give verbose debugging output.
360398
361399`--quiet`
362400
@@ -380,11 +418,12 @@ General options
380418
381419: List supported output formats, one per line.
382420
383−`--list-extensions`
421+`--list-extensions`[`=`*FORMAT*]
384422
385−: List supported Markdown extensions, one per line, followed
423+: List supported extensions for *FORMAT*, one per line, preceded
386424 by a `+` or `-` indicating whether it is enabled by default
387− in pandoc's Markdown.
425+ in *FORMAT*. If *FORMAT* is not specified, defaults for
426+ pandoc's Markdown are given.
388427
389428`--list-highlight-languages`
390429
@@ -404,12 +443,95 @@ General options
404443
405444: Show usage message.
406445
407−Reader options
408−--------------
446+[Markdown]: https://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/
447+[CommonMark]: https://commonmark.org
448+[PHP Markdown Extra]: https://michelf.ca/projects/php-markdown/extra/
449+[GitHub-Flavored Markdown]: https://help.github.com/articles/github-flavored-markdown/
450+[MultiMarkdown]: https://fletcherpenney.net/multimarkdown/
451+[reStructuredText]: https://docutils.sourceforge.io/docs/ref/rst/introduction.html
452+[S5]: https://meyerweb.com/eric/tools/s5/
453+[Slidy]: https://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2/
454+[Slideous]: https://goessner.net/articles/slideous/
455+[HTML]: https://www.w3.org/html/
456+[HTML5]: https://html.spec.whatwg.org/
457+[polyglot markup]: https://www.w3.org/TR/html-polyglot/
458+[XHTML]: https://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/
459+[LaTeX]: https://www.latex-project.org/
460+[`beamer`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer
461+[Beamer User's Guide]: http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf
462+[ConTeXt]: https://www.contextgarden.net/
463+[Rich Text Format]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rich_Text_Format
464+[DocBook]: https://docbook.org
465+[JATS]: https://jats.nlm.nih.gov
466+[Jira]: https://jira.atlassian.com/secure/WikiRendererHelpAction.jspa?section=all
467+[txt2tags]: https://txt2tags.org
468+[EPUB]: http://idpf.org/epub
469+[OPML]: http://dev.opml.org/spec2.html
470+[OpenDocument]: http://opendocument.xml.org
471+[ODT]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenDocument
472+[Textile]: https://www.promptworks.com/textile
473+[MediaWiki markup]: https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Formatting
474+[DokuWiki markup]: https://www.dokuwiki.org/dokuwiki
475+[ZimWiki markup]: https://zim-wiki.org/manual/Help/Wiki_Syntax.html
476+[XWiki markup]: https://www.xwiki.org/xwiki/bin/view/Documentation/UserGuide/Features/XWikiSyntax/
477+[TWiki markup]: https://twiki.org/cgi-bin/view/TWiki/TextFormattingRules
478+[TikiWiki markup]: https://doc.tiki.org/Wiki-Syntax-Text#The_Markup_Language_Wiki-Syntax
479+[Haddock markup]: https://www.haskell.org/haddock/doc/html/ch03s08.html
480+[Creole 1.0]: http://www.wikicreole.org/wiki/Creole1.0
481+[CSV]: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4180
482+[roff man]: https://man.cx/groff_man(7)
483+[roff ms]: https://man.cx/groff_ms(7)
484+[Haskell]: https://www.haskell.org
485+[GNU Texinfo]: https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
486+[Emacs Org mode]: https://orgmode.org
487+[AsciiDoc]: https://www.methods.co.nz/asciidoc/
488+[AsciiDoctor]: https://asciidoctor.org/
489+[DZSlides]: https://paulrouget.com/dzslides/
490+[Word docx]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Office_Open_XML
491+[PDF]: https://www.adobe.com/pdf/
492+[reveal.js]: https://revealjs.com/
493+[FictionBook2]: http://www.fictionbook.org/index.php/Eng:XML_Schema_Fictionbook_2.1
494+[Jupyter notebook]: https://nbformat.readthedocs.io/en/latest/
495+[InDesign ICML]: https://wwwimages.adobe.com/www.adobe.com/content/dam/acom/en/devnet/indesign/sdk/cs6/idml/idml-cookbook.pdf
496+[TEI Simple]: https://github.com/TEIC/TEI-Simple
497+[Muse]: https://amusewiki.org/library/manual
498+[PowerPoint]: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Microsoft_PowerPoint
499+[Vimwiki]: https://vimwiki.github.io
500+[CSL JSON]: https://citeproc-js.readthedocs.io/en/latest/csl-json/markup.html
501+[BibTeX]: https://ctan.org/pkg/bibtex
502+[BibLaTeX]: https://ctan.org/pkg/biblatex
503+
504+## Reader options {.options}
505+
506+`--shift-heading-level-by=`*NUMBER*
507+
508+: Shift heading levels by a positive or negative integer.
509+ For example, with `--shift-heading-level-by=-1`, level 2
510+ headings become level 1 headings, and level 3 headings
511+ become level 2 headings. Headings cannot have a level
512+ less than 1, so a heading that would be shifted below level 1
513+ becomes a regular paragraph. Exception: with a shift of -N,
514+ a level-N heading at the beginning of the document
515+ replaces the metadata title. `--shift-heading-level-by=-1`
516+ is a good choice when converting HTML or Markdown documents that
517+ use an initial level-1 heading for the document title and
518+ level-2+ headings for sections. `--shift-heading-level-by=1`
519+ may be a good choice for converting Markdown documents that
520+ use level-1 headings for sections to HTML, since pandoc uses
521+ a level-1 heading to render the document title.
409522
410523`--base-header-level=`*NUMBER*
411524
412−: Specify the base level for headers (defaults to 1).
525+: *Deprecated. Use `--shift-heading-level-by`=X instead,
526+ where X = NUMBER - 1.* Specify the base level for headings
527+ (defaults to 1).
528+
529+`--strip-empty-paragraphs`
530+
531+: *Deprecated. Use the `+empty_paragraphs` extension instead.*
532+ Ignore paragraphs with no content. This option is useful
533+ for converting word processing documents where users have
534+ used empty paragraphs to create inter-paragraph space.
413535
414536`--indented-code-classes=`*CLASSES*
415537
@@ -432,7 +554,7 @@ Reader options
432554 footnotes and links will not work across files. Reading binary
433555 files (docx, odt, epub) implies `--file-scope`.
434556
435−`--filter=`*PROGRAM*
557+`-F` *PROGRAM*, `--filter=`*PROGRAM*
436558
437559: Specify an executable to be used as a filter transforming the
438560 pandoc AST after the input is parsed and before the output is
@@ -454,7 +576,7 @@ Reader options
454576 Those who would prefer to write filters in python can use the
455577 module [`pandocfilters`], installable from PyPI. There are also
456578 pandoc filter libraries in [PHP], [perl], and
457− [javascript/node.js].
579+ [JavaScript/node.js].
458580
459581 In order of preference, pandoc will look for filters in
460582
@@ -462,50 +584,70 @@ Reader options
462584 non-executable)
463585
464586 2. `$DATADIR/filters` (executable or non-executable)
587+ where `$DATADIR` is the user data directory (see
588+ `--data-dir`, above).
465589
466590 3. `$PATH` (executable only)
467591
468−`--lua-filter=`*SCRIPT*
592+ Filters, Lua-filters, and citeproc processing are applied in
593+ the order specified on the command line.
594+
595+`-L` *SCRIPT*, `--lua-filter=`*SCRIPT*
469596
470597: Transform the document in a similar fashion as JSON filters (see
471− `--filter`), but use pandoc's build-in lua filtering system. The given
472− lua script is expected to return a list of lua filters which will be
473− applied in order. Each lua filter must contain element-transforming
598+ `--filter`), but use pandoc's built-in Lua filtering system. The given
599+ Lua script is expected to return a list of Lua filters which will be
600+ applied in order. Each Lua filter must contain element-transforming
474601 functions indexed by the name of the AST element on which the filter
475602 function should be applied.
476603
477− The `pandoc` lua module provides helper functions for element
478− creation. It is always loaded into the script's lua environment.
604+ The `pandoc` Lua module provides helper functions for element
605+ creation. It is always loaded into the script's Lua environment.
606+
607+ See the [Lua filters documentation] for further details.
479608
480− The following is an example lua script for macro-expansion:
609+ In order of preference, pandoc will look for Lua filters in
481610
482− function expand_hello_world(inline)
483− if inline.c == '{{helloworld}}' then
484− return pandoc.Emph{ pandoc.Str "Hello, World" }
485− else
486− return inline
487− end
488− end
611+ 1. a specified full or relative path
489612
490− return {{Str = expand_hello_world}}
613+ 2. `$DATADIR/filters` where `$DATADIR` is the user data
614+ directory (see `--data-dir`, above).
491615
616+ Filters, Lua filters, and citeproc processing are applied in
617+ the order specified on the command line.
492618
493619`-M` *KEY*[`=`*VAL*], `--metadata=`*KEY*[`:`*VAL*]
494620
495621: Set the metadata field *KEY* to the value *VAL*. A value specified
496− on the command line overrides a value specified in the document.
622+ on the command line overrides a value specified in the document
623+ using [YAML metadata blocks][Extension: `yaml_metadata_block`].
497624 Values will be parsed as YAML boolean or string values. If no value is
498625 specified, the value will be treated as Boolean true. Like
499626 `--variable`, `--metadata` causes template variables to be set.
500627 But unlike `--variable`, `--metadata` affects the metadata of the
501628 underlying document (which is accessible from filters and may be
502− printed in some output formats).
629+ printed in some output formats) and metadata values will be escaped
630+ when inserted into the template.
631+
632+`--metadata-file=`*FILE*
633+
634+: Read metadata from the supplied YAML (or JSON) file. This
635+ option can be used with every input format, but string scalars
636+ in the YAML file will always be parsed as Markdown. Generally,
637+ the input will be handled the same as in [YAML metadata
638+ blocks][Extension: `yaml_metadata_block`]. This option can be
639+ used repeatedly to include multiple metadata files; values in
640+ files specified later on the command line will be preferred
641+ over those specified in earlier files. Metadata values
642+ specified inside the document, or by using `-M`, overwrite
643+ values specified with this option.
503644
504645`-p`, `--preserve-tabs`
505646
506−: Preserve tabs instead of converting them to spaces (the default).
507− Note that this will only affect tabs in literal code spans and code
508− blocks; tabs in regular text will be treated as spaces.
647+: Preserve tabs instead of converting them to spaces. (By default, pandoc
648+ converts tabs to spaces before parsing its input.) Note that this will
649+ only affect tabs in literal code spans and code blocks. Tabs in regular
650+ text are always treated as spaces.
509651
510652`--tab-stop=`*NUMBER*
511653
@@ -515,27 +657,30 @@ Reader options
515657
516658: Specifies what to do with insertions, deletions, and comments
517659 produced by the MS Word "Track Changes" feature. `accept` (the
518− default), inserts all insertions, and ignores all
519− deletions. `reject` inserts all deletions and ignores
520− insertions. Both `accept` and `reject` ignore comments. `all` puts
521− in insertions, deletions, and comments, wrapped in spans with
522− `insertion`, `deletion`, `comment-start`, and `comment-end`
523− classes, respectively. The author and time of change is
524− included. `all` is useful for scripting: only accepting changes
525− from a certain reviewer, say, or before a certain date. This
526− option only affects the docx reader.
660+ default) processes all the insertions and deletions.
661+ `reject` ignores them. Both `accept` and `reject` ignore comments.
662+ `all` includes all insertions, deletions, and comments, wrapped
663+ in spans with `insertion`, `deletion`, `comment-start`, and
664+ `comment-end` classes, respectively. The author and time of
665+ change is included. `all` is useful for scripting: only
666+ accepting changes from a certain reviewer, say, or before a
667+ certain date. If a paragraph is inserted or deleted,
668+ `track-changes=all` produces a span with the class
669+ `paragraph-insertion`/`paragraph-deletion` before the
670+ affected paragraph break. This option only affects the docx
671+ reader.
527672
528673`--extract-media=`*DIR*
529674
530675: Extract images and other media contained in or linked from
531676 the source document to the path *DIR*, creating it if
532677 necessary, and adjust the images references in the document
533− so they point to the extracted files. If the source format is
534− a binary container (docx, epub, or odt), the media is
535− extracted from the container and the original
536− filenames are used. Otherwise the media is read from the
537− file system or downloaded, and new filenames are constructed
538− based on SHA1 hashes of the contents.
678+ so they point to the extracted files. Media are downloaded,
679+ read from the file system, or extracted from a binary
680+ container (e.g. docx), as needed. The original file paths
681+ are used if they are relative paths not containing `..`.
682+ Otherwise filenames are constructed from the SHA1 hash of
683+ the contents.
539684
540685`--abbreviations=`*FILE*
541686
@@ -546,29 +691,30 @@ Reader options
546691 system default, use
547692 `pandoc --print-default-data-file=abbreviations`. The only
548693 use pandoc makes of this list is in the Markdown reader.
549− Strings ending in a period that are found in this list will
550− be followed by a nonbreaking space, so that the period will
551− not produce sentence-ending space in formats like LaTeX.
694+ Strings found in this list will be followed by a nonbreaking
695+ space, and the period will not produce sentence-ending space
696+ in formats like LaTeX. The strings may not contain spaces.
552697
553698[`pandocfilters`]: https://github.com/jgm/pandocfilters
554699[PHP]: https://github.com/vinai/pandocfilters-php
555700[perl]: https://metacpan.org/pod/Pandoc::Filter
556−[javascript/node.js]: https://github.com/mvhenderson/pandoc-filter-node
701+[JavaScript/node.js]: https://github.com/mvhenderson/pandoc-filter-node
702+[Lua filters documentation]: https://pandoc.org/lua-filters.html
557703
558−General writer options
559−----------------------
704+## General writer options {.options}
560705
561706`-s`, `--standalone`
562707
563708: Produce output with an appropriate header and footer (e.g. a
564709 standalone HTML, LaTeX, TEI, or RTF file, not a fragment). This option
565710 is set automatically for `pdf`, `epub`, `epub3`, `fb2`, `docx`, and `odt`
566− output.
711+ output. For `native` output, this option causes metadata to
712+ be included; otherwise, metadata is suppressed.
567713
568−`--template=`*FILE*
714+`--template=`*FILE*|*URL*
569715
570−: Use *FILE* as a custom template for the generated document. Implies
571− `--standalone`. See [Templates], below, for a description
716+: Use the specified file as a custom template for the generated document.
717+ Implies `--standalone`. See [Templates], below, for a description
572718 of template syntax. If no extension is specified, an extension
573719 corresponding to the writer will be added, so that `--template=special`
574720 looks for `special.html` for HTML output. If the template is not
@@ -580,35 +726,45 @@ General writer options
580726`-V` *KEY*[`=`*VAL*], `--variable=`*KEY*[`:`*VAL*]
581727
582728: Set the template variable *KEY* to the value *VAL* when rendering the
583− document in standalone mode. This is generally only useful when the
584− `--template` option is used to specify a custom template, since
585− pandoc automatically sets the variables used in the default
586− templates. If no *VAL* is specified, the key will be given the
587− value `true`.
729+ document in standalone mode. If no *VAL* is specified, the
730+ key will be given the value `true`.
588731
589732`-D` *FORMAT*, `--print-default-template=`*FORMAT*
590733
591734: Print the system default template for an output *FORMAT*. (See `-t`
592735 for a list of possible *FORMAT*s.) Templates in the user data
593− directory are ignored.
736+ directory are ignored. This option may be used with
737+ `-o`/`--output` to redirect output to a file, but
738+ `-o`/`--output` must come before `--print-default-template`
739+ on the command line.
740+
741+ Note that some of the default templates use partials, for
742+ example `styles.html`. To print the partials, use
743+ `--print-default-data-file`: for example,
744+ `--print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html`.
594745
595746`--print-default-data-file=`*FILE*
596747
597748: Print a system default data file. Files in the user data directory
598− are ignored.
749+ are ignored. This option may be used with `-o`/`--output` to
750+ redirect output to a file, but `-o`/`--output` must come before
751+ `--print-default-data-file` on the command line.
599752
600753`--eol=crlf`|`lf`|`native`
601754
602755: Manually specify line endings: `crlf` (Windows), `lf`
603− (MacOS/linux/unix), or `native` (line endings appropriate
756+ (macOS/Linux/UNIX), or `native` (line endings appropriate
604757 to the OS on which pandoc is being run). The default is
605758 `native`.
606759
607760`--dpi`=*NUMBER*
608761
609−: Specify the dpi (dots per inch) value for conversion from pixels
610− to inch/centimeters and vice versa. The default is 96dpi.
611− Technically, the correct term would be ppi (pixels per inch).
762+: Specify the default dpi (dots per inch) value for conversion
763+ from pixels to inch/centimeters and vice versa. (Technically,
764+ the correct term would be ppi: pixels per inch.) The default
765+ is 96dpi. When images contain information about dpi
766+ internally, the encoded value is used instead of the default
767+ specified by this option.
612768
613769`--wrap=auto`|`none`|`preserve`
614770
@@ -621,6 +777,8 @@ General writer options
621777 where there are nonsemantic newlines in the source, there
622778 will be nonsemantic newlines in the output as well).
623779 Automatic wrapping does not currently work in HTML output.
780+ In `ipynb` output, this option affects wrapping of the
781+ contents of markdown cells.
624782
625783`--columns=`*NUMBER*
626784
@@ -633,14 +791,29 @@ General writer options
633791: Include an automatically generated table of contents (or, in
634792 the case of `latex`, `context`, `docx`, `odt`,
635793 `opendocument`, `rst`, or `ms`, an instruction to create
636− one) in the output document. This option has no effect on
637− `man`, `docbook4`, `docbook5`, or `jats` output.
794+ one) in the output document. This option has no effect
795+ unless `-s/--standalone` is used, and it has no effect
796+ on `man`, `docbook4`, `docbook5`, or `jats` output.
797+
798+ Note that if you are producing a PDF via `ms`, the table
799+ of contents will appear at the beginning of the
800+ document, before the title. If you would prefer it to
801+ be at the end of the document, use the option
802+ `--pdf-engine-opt=--no-toc-relocation`.
638803
639804`--toc-depth=`*NUMBER*
640805
641806: Specify the number of section levels to include in the table
642− of contents. The default is 3 (which means that level 1, 2, and 3
643− headers will be listed in the contents).
807+ of contents. The default is 3 (which means that level-1, 2, and 3
808+ headings will be listed in the contents).
809+
810+`--strip-comments`
811+
812+: Strip out HTML comments in the Markdown or Textile source,
813+ rather than passing them on to Markdown, Textile or HTML
814+ output as raw HTML. This does not apply to HTML comments
815+ inside raw HTML blocks when the `markdown_in_html_blocks`
816+ extension is not set.
644817
645818`--no-highlight`
646819
@@ -659,8 +832,19 @@ General writer options
659832 Instead of a *STYLE* name, a JSON file with extension
660833 `.theme` may be supplied. This will be parsed as a KDE
661834 syntax highlighting theme and (if valid) used as the
662− highlighting style. To see a sample theme that can be
663− modified, `pandoc --print-default-data-file default.theme`.
835+ highlighting style.
836+
837+ To generate the JSON version of an existing style,
838+ use `--print-highlight-style`.
839+
840+`--print-highlight-style=`*STYLE*|*FILE*
841+
842+: Prints a JSON version of a highlighting style, which can
843+ be modified, saved with a `.theme` extension, and used
844+ with `--highlight-style`. This option may be used with
845+ `-o`/`--output` to redirect output to a file, but
846+ `-o`/`--output` must come before `--print-highlight-style`
847+ on the command line.
664848
665849`--syntax-definition=`*FILE*
666850
@@ -668,9 +852,10 @@ General writer options
668852 which will be used for syntax highlighting of appropriately
669853 marked code blocks. This can be used to add support for
670854 new languages or to use altered syntax definitions for
671− existing languages.
855+ existing languages. This option may be repeated to add
856+ multiple syntax definitions.
672857
673−`-H` *FILE*, `--include-in-header=`*FILE*
858+`-H` *FILE*, `--include-in-header=`*FILE*|*URL*
674859
675860: Include contents of *FILE*, verbatim, at the end of the header.
676861 This can be used, for example, to include special
@@ -678,7 +863,7 @@ General writer options
678863 repeatedly to include multiple files in the header. They will be
679864 included in the order specified. Implies `--standalone`.
680865
681−`-B` *FILE*, `--include-before-body=`*FILE*
866+`-B` *FILE*, `--include-before-body=`*FILE*|*URL*
682867
683868: Include contents of *FILE*, verbatim, at the beginning of the
684869 document body (e.g. after the `<body>` tag in HTML, or the
@@ -687,7 +872,7 @@ General writer options
687872 used repeatedly to include multiple files. They will be included in
688873 the order specified. Implies `--standalone`.
689874
690−`-A` *FILE*, `--include-after-body=`*FILE*
875+`-A` *FILE*, `--include-after-body=`*FILE*|*URL*
691876
692877: Include contents of *FILE*, verbatim, at the end of the document
693878 body (before the `</body>` tag in HTML, or the
@@ -698,29 +883,47 @@ General writer options
698883`--resource-path=`*SEARCHPATH*
699884
700885: List of paths to search for images and other resources.
701− The paths should be separated by `:` on linux, unix, and
702− MacOS systems, and by `;` on Windows. If `--resource-path`
886+ The paths should be separated by `:` on Linux, UNIX, and
887+ macOS systems, and by `;` on Windows. If `--resource-path`
703888 is not specified, the default resource path is the working
704889 directory. Note that, if `--resource-path` is specified,
705890 the working directory must be explicitly listed or it
706891 will not be searched. For example:
707892 `--resource-path=.:test` will search the working directory
708893 and the `test` subdirectory, in that order.
894+ This option can be used repeatedly. Search path components
895+ that come later on the command line will be searched before
896+ those that come earlier, so
897+ `--resource-path foo:bar --resource-path baz:bim` is
898+ equivalent to `--resource-path baz:bim:foo:bar`.
899+
900+`--request-header=`*NAME*`:`*VAL*
901+
902+: Set the request header *NAME* to the value *VAL* when making
903+ HTTP requests (for example, when a URL is given on the
904+ command line, or when resources used in a document must be
905+ downloaded). If you're behind a proxy, you also need to set
906+ the environment variable `http_proxy` to `http://...`.
907+
908+`--no-check-certificate`
709909
710−Options affecting specific writers
711−----------------------------------
910+: Disable the certificate verification to allow access to
911+ unsecure HTTP resources (for example when the certificate
912+ is no longer valid or self signed).
913+
914+## Options affecting specific writers {.options}
712915
713916`--self-contained`
714917
715918: Produce a standalone HTML file with no external dependencies, using
716919 `data:` URIs to incorporate the contents of linked scripts, stylesheets,
717− images, and videos. The resulting file should be "self-contained,"
718− in the sense that it needs no external files and no net access to be
719− displayed properly by a browser. This option works only with HTML output
720− formats, including `html4`, `html5`, `html+lhs`, `html5+lhs`, `s5`,
721− `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`, and `revealjs`. Scripts, images, and
722− stylesheets at absolute URLs will be downloaded; those at relative URLs
723− will be sought relative to the working directory (if the first source
920+ images, and videos. Implies `--standalone`. The resulting file should be
921+ "self-contained," in the sense that it needs no external files and no net
922+ access to be displayed properly by a browser. This option works only with
923+ HTML output formats, including `html4`, `html5`, `html+lhs`, `html5+lhs`,
924+ `s5`, `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`, and `revealjs`. Scripts, images,
925+ and stylesheets at absolute URLs will be downloaded; those at relative
926+ URLs will be sought relative to the working directory (if the first source
724927 file is local) or relative to the base URL (if the first source
725928 file is remote). Elements with the attribute
726929 `data-external="1"` will be left alone; the documents they
@@ -733,13 +936,18 @@ Options affecting specific writers
733936
734937`--html-q-tags`
735938
736−: Use `<q>` tags for quotes in HTML.
939+: Use `<q>` tags for quotes in HTML. (This option only has an
940+ effect if the `smart` extension is enabled for the input
941+ format used.)
737942
738943`--ascii`
739944
740−: Use only ASCII characters in output. Currently supported only for
741− HTML and DocBook output (which uses numerical entities instead of
742− UTF-8 when this option is selected).
945+: Use only ASCII characters in output. Currently supported for XML
946+ and HTML formats (which use entities instead of UTF-8 when this
947+ option is selected), CommonMark, gfm, and Markdown (which use
948+ entities), roff ms (which use hexadecimal escapes), and to a
949+ limited degree LaTeX (which uses standard commands for accented
950+ characters when possible). roff man output uses ASCII by default.
743951
744952`--reference-links`
745953
@@ -748,35 +956,45 @@ Options affecting specific writers
748956 placement of link references is affected by the
749957 `--reference-location` option.
750958
751−`--reference-location = block`|`section`|`document`
959+`--reference-location=block`|`section`|`document`
752960
753961: Specify whether footnotes (and references, if `reference-links` is
754962 set) are placed at the end of the current (top-level) block, the
755963 current section, or the document. The default is
756964 `document`. Currently only affects the markdown writer.
757965
966+`--markdown-headings=setext`|`atx`
967+
968+: Specify whether to use ATX-style (`#`-prefixed) or
969+ Setext-style (underlined) headings for level 1 and 2
970+ headings in Markdown output. (The default is `atx`.)
971+ ATX-style headings are always used for levels 3+.
972+ This option also affects Markdown cells in `ipynb` output.
973+
758974`--atx-headers`
759975
760−: Use ATX-style headers in Markdown and AsciiDoc output. The default is
761− to use setext-style headers for levels 1-2, and then ATX headers.
976+: *Deprecated synonym for `--markdown-headings=atx`.*
762977
763−`--top-level-division=[default|section|chapter|part]`
978+`--top-level-division=default`|`section`|`chapter`|`part`
764979
765−: Treat top-level headers as the given division type in LaTeX, ConTeXt,
766− DocBook, and TEI output. The hierarchy order is part, chapter, then section;
767− all headers are shifted such that the top-level header becomes the specified
768− type. The default behavior is to determine the best division type via
769− heuristics: unless other conditions apply, `section` is chosen. When the
770− LaTeX document class is set to `report`, `book`, or `memoir` (unless the
771− `article` option is specified), `chapter` is implied as the setting for this
772− option. If `beamer` is the output format, specifying either `chapter` or
773− `part` will cause top-level headers to become `\part{..}`, while
774− second-level headers remain as their default type.
980+: Treat top-level headings as the given division type in
981+ LaTeX, ConTeXt, DocBook, and TEI output. The hierarchy
982+ order is part, chapter, then section; all headings are
983+ shifted such that the top-level heading becomes the
984+ specified type. The default behavior is to determine the
985+ best division type via heuristics: unless other conditions
986+ apply, `section` is chosen. When the `documentclass`
987+ variable is set to `report`, `book`, or `memoir` (unless the
988+ `article` option is specified), `chapter` is implied as the
989+ setting for this option. If `beamer` is the output format,
990+ specifying either `chapter` or `part` will cause top-level
991+ headings to become `\part{..}`, while second-level headings
992+ remain as their default type.
775993
776994`-N`, `--number-sections`
777995
778−: Number section headings in LaTeX, ConTeXt, HTML, or EPUB output.
779− By default, sections are not numbered. Sections with class
996+: Number section headings in LaTeX, ConTeXt, HTML, Docx, ms, or EPUB
997+ output. By default, sections are not numbered. Sections with class
780998 `unnumbered` will never be numbered, even if `--number-sections`
781999 is specified.
7821000
@@ -784,16 +1002,19 @@ Options affecting specific writers
7841002
7851003: Offset for section headings in HTML output (ignored in other
7861004 output formats). The first number is added to the section number for
787− top-level headers, the second for second-level headers, and so on.
788− So, for example, if you want the first top-level header in your
1005+ top-level headings, the second for second-level headings, and so on.
1006+ So, for example, if you want the first top-level heading in your
7891007 document to be numbered "6", specify `--number-offset=5`.
790− If your document starts with a level-2 header which you want to
1008+ If your document starts with a level-2 heading which you want to
7911009 be numbered "1.5", specify `--number-offset=1,4`.
7921010 Offsets are 0 by default. Implies `--number-sections`.
7931011
7941012`--listings`
7951013
796−: Use the [`listings`] package for LaTeX code blocks
1014+: Use the [`listings`] package for LaTeX code blocks. The package
1015+ does not support multi-byte encoding for source code. To handle UTF-8
1016+ you would need to use a custom template. This issue is fully
1017+ documented here: [Encoding issue with the listings package].
7971018
7981019`-i`, `--incremental`
7991020
@@ -802,22 +1023,22 @@ Options affecting specific writers
8021023
8031024`--slide-level=`*NUMBER*
8041025
805−: Specifies that headers with the specified level create
806− slides (for `beamer`, `s5`, `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`). Headers
1026+: Specifies that headings with the specified level create
1027+ slides (for `beamer`, `s5`, `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`). Headings
8071028 above this level in the hierarchy are used to divide the
808− slide show into sections; headers below this level create
1029+ slide show into sections; headings below this level create
8091030 subheads within a slide. Note that content that is
810− not contained under slide-level headers will not appear in
1031+ not contained under slide-level headings will not appear in
8111032 the slide show. The default is to set the slide level based
8121033 on the contents of the document; see [Structuring the slide
8131034 show].
8141035
8151036`--section-divs`
8161037
817−: Wrap sections in `<div>` tags (or `<section>` tags in HTML5),
818− and attach identifiers to the enclosing `<div>` (or `<section>`)
819− rather than the header itself. See
820− [Header identifiers], below.
1038+: Wrap sections in `<section>` tags (or `<div>` tags for `html4`),
1039+ and attach identifiers to the enclosing `<section>` (or `<div>`)
1040+ rather than the heading itself. See
1041+ [Heading identifiers], below.
8211042
8221043`--email-obfuscation=none`|`javascript`|`references`
8231044
@@ -838,8 +1059,7 @@ Options affecting specific writers
8381059
8391060: Specify *STRING* as a prefix at the beginning of the title
8401061 that appears in the HTML header (but not in the title as it
841− appears at the beginning of the HTML body). Implies
842− `--standalone`.
1062+ appears at the beginning of the HTML body). Implies `--standalone`.
8431063
8441064`-c` *URL*, `--css=`*URL*
8451065
@@ -847,8 +1067,8 @@ Options affecting specific writers
8471067 include multiple files. They will be included in the order specified.
8481068
8491069 A stylesheet is required for generating EPUB. If none is
850− provided using this option (or the `stylesheet` metadata
851− field), pandoc will look for a file `epub.css` in the
1070+ provided using this option (or the `css` or `stylesheet`
1071+ metadata fields), pandoc will look for a file `epub.css` in the
8521072 user data directory (see `--data-dir`). If it is not
8531073 found there, sensible defaults will be used.
8541074
@@ -871,20 +1091,56 @@ Options affecting specific writers
8711091
8721092 To produce a custom `reference.docx`, first get a copy of
8731093 the default `reference.docx`: `pandoc
874− --print-default-data-file reference.docx >
875− custom-reference.docx`. Then open `custom-reference.docx`
876− in Word, modify the styles as you wish, and save the file.
877− For best results, do not make changes to this file other
878− than modifying the styles used by pandoc: [paragraph]
879− Normal, Body Text, First Paragraph, Compact, Title,
880− Subtitle, Author, Date, Abstract, Bibliography, Heading 1,
881− Heading 2, Heading 3, Heading 4, Heading 5, Heading 6,
882− Heading 7, Heading 8, Heading 9, Block Text, Footnote Text,
883− Definition Term, Definition, Caption, Table Caption,
884− Image Caption, Figure, Captioned Figure, TOC Heading;
885− [character] Default Paragraph Font, Body Text Char,
886− Verbatim Char, Footnote Reference, Hyperlink; [table]
887− Table.
1094+ -o custom-reference.docx --print-default-data-file reference.docx`.
1095+ Then open `custom-reference.docx` in Word, modify the
1096+ styles as you wish, and save the file. For best
1097+ results, do not make changes to this file other than
1098+ modifying the styles used by pandoc:
1099+
1100+ Paragraph styles:
1101+
1102+ - Normal
1103+ - Body Text
1104+ - First Paragraph
1105+ - Compact
1106+ - Title
1107+ - Subtitle
1108+ - Author
1109+ - Date
1110+ - Abstract
1111+ - Bibliography
1112+ - Heading 1
1113+ - Heading 2
1114+ - Heading 3
1115+ - Heading 4
1116+ - Heading 5
1117+ - Heading 6
1118+ - Heading 7
1119+ - Heading 8
1120+ - Heading 9
1121+ - Block Text
1122+ - Footnote Text
1123+ - Definition Term
1124+ - Definition
1125+ - Caption
1126+ - Table Caption
1127+ - Image Caption
1128+ - Figure
1129+ - Captioned Figure
1130+ - TOC Heading
1131+
1132+ Character styles:
1133+
1134+ - Default Paragraph Font
1135+ - Body Text Char
1136+ - Verbatim Char
1137+ - Footnote Reference
1138+ - Hyperlink
1139+ - Section Number
1140+
1141+ Table style:
1142+
1143+ - Table
8881144
8891145 ODT
8901146
@@ -898,10 +1154,33 @@ Options affecting specific writers
8981154
8991155 To produce a custom `reference.odt`, first get a copy of
9001156 the default `reference.odt`: `pandoc
901− --print-default-data-file reference.odt >
902− custom-reference.odt`. Then open `custom-reference.odt` in
903− LibreOffice, modify the styles as you wish, and save the
904− file.
1157+ -o custom-reference.odt --print-default-data-file reference.odt`.
1158+ Then open `custom-reference.odt` in LibreOffice, modify
1159+ the styles as you wish, and save the file.
1160+
1161+ PowerPoint
1162+
1163+ : Templates included with Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 (either with
1164+ `.pptx` or `.potx` extension) are known to work, as are most
1165+ templates derived from these.
1166+
1167+ The specific requirement is that the template should begin with
1168+ the following first four layouts:
1169+
1170+ 1. Title Slide
1171+ 2. Title and Content
1172+ 3. Section Header
1173+ 4. Two Content
1174+
1175+ All templates included with a recent version of MS PowerPoint
1176+ will fit these criteria. (You can click on `Layout` under the
1177+ `Home` menu to check.)
1178+
1179+ You can also modify the default `reference.pptx`: first run
1180+ `pandoc -o custom-reference.pptx --print-default-data-file
1181+ reference.pptx`, and then modify `custom-reference.pptx`
1182+ in MS PowerPoint (pandoc will use the first four layout
1183+ slides, as mentioned above).
9051184
9061185`--epub-cover-image=`*FILE*
9071186
@@ -969,12 +1248,12 @@ Options affecting specific writers
9691248
9701249`--epub-chapter-level=`*NUMBER*
9711250
972−: Specify the header level at which to split the EPUB into separate
973− "chapter" files. The default is to split into chapters at level 1
974− headers. This option only affects the internal composition of the
1251+: Specify the heading level at which to split the EPUB into separate
1252+ "chapter" files. The default is to split into chapters at level-1
1253+ headings. This option only affects the internal composition of the
9751254 EPUB, not the way chapters and sections are displayed to users. Some
9761255 readers may be slow if the chapter files are too large, so for large
977− documents with few level 1 headers, one might want to use a chapter
1256+ documents with few level-1 headings, one might want to use a chapter
9781257 level of 2 or 3.
9791258
9801259`--epub-subdirectory=`*DIRNAME*
@@ -983,111 +1262,145 @@ Options affecting specific writers
9831262 the EPUB-specific contents. The default is `EPUB`. To put
9841263 the EPUB contents in the top level, use an empty string.
9851264
986−`--latex-engine=pdflatex`|`lualatex`|`xelatex`
987−
988−: Use the specified LaTeX engine when producing PDF output.
989− The default is `pdflatex`. If the engine is not in your PATH,
990− the full path of the engine may be specified here.
991−
992−`--latex-engine-opt=`*STRING*
993−
994−: Use the given string as a command-line argument to the `latex-engine`.
995− If used multiple times, the arguments are provided with spaces between
996− them. Note that no check for duplicate options is done.
997−
998−[Dublin Core elements]: http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/
999−[ISO 8601 format]: http://www.w3.org/TR/NOTE-datetime
1000−
1001−Citation rendering
1002−------------------
1265+`--ipynb-output=all|none|best`
1266+
1267+: Determines how ipynb output cells are treated. `all` means
1268+ that all of the data formats included in the original are
1269+ preserved. `none` means that the contents of data cells
1270+ are omitted. `best` causes pandoc to try to pick the
1271+ richest data block in each output cell that is compatible
1272+ with the output format. The default is `best`.
1273+
1274+`--pdf-engine=`*PROGRAM*
1275+
1276+: Use the specified engine when producing PDF output.
1277+ Valid values are `pdflatex`, `lualatex`, `xelatex`, `latexmk`,
1278+ `tectonic`, `wkhtmltopdf`, `weasyprint`, `prince`, `context`,
1279+ and `pdfroff`. If the engine is not in your PATH, the full
1280+ path of the engine may be specified here. If this option
1281+ is not specified, pandoc uses the following defaults
1282+ depending on the output format specified using `-t/--to`:
1283+
1284+ - `-t latex` or none: `pdflatex` (other options: `xelatex`, `lualatex`,
1285+ `tectonic`, `latexmk`)
1286+ - `-t context`: `context`
1287+ - `-t html`: `wkhtmltopdf` (other options: `prince`, `weasyprint`;
1288+ see [print-css.rocks](https://print-css.rocks) for a good
1289+ introduction to PDF generation from HTML/CSS.)
1290+ - `-t ms`: `pdfroff`
1291+
1292+`--pdf-engine-opt=`*STRING*
1293+
1294+: Use the given string as a command-line argument to the `pdf-engine`.
1295+ For example, to use a persistent directory `foo` for `latexmk`'s
1296+ auxiliary files, use `--pdf-engine-opt=-outdir=foo`.
1297+ Note that no check for duplicate options is done.
1298+
1299+[Dublin Core elements]: https://www.dublincore.org/specifications/dublin-core/dces/
1300+[ISO 8601 format]: https://www.w3.org/TR/NOTE-datetime
1301+[Encoding issue with the listings package]:
1302+ https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX/Source_Code_Listings#Encoding_issue
1303+
1304+## Citation rendering {.options}
1305+
1306+`-C`, `--citeproc`
1307+
1308+: Process the citations in the file, replacing them with
1309+ rendered citations and adding a bibliography.
1310+ Citation processing will not take place unless bibliographic
1311+ data is supplied, either through an external file specified
1312+ using the `--bibliography` option or the `bibliography`
1313+ field in metadata, or via a `references` section in metadata
1314+ containing a list of citations in CSL YAML format with
1315+ Markdown formatting. The style is controlled by a [CSL]
1316+ stylesheet specified using the `--csl` option or the `csl`
1317+ field in metadata. (If no stylesheet is specified,
1318+ the `chicago-author-date` style will be used by default.)
1319+ The citation processing transformation may be applied before
1320+ or after filters or Lua filters (see `--filter`,
1321+ `--lua-filter`): these transformations are applied in the
1322+ order they appear on the command line. For more
1323+ information, see the section on [Citations].
10031324
10041325`--bibliography=`*FILE*
10051326
10061327: Set the `bibliography` field in the document's metadata to *FILE*,
1007− overriding any value set in the metadata, and process citations
1008− using `pandoc-citeproc`. (This is equivalent to
1009− `--metadata bibliography=FILE --filter pandoc-citeproc`.)
1010− If `--natbib` or `--biblatex` is also supplied, `pandoc-citeproc` is not
1011− used, making this equivalent to `--metadata bibliography=FILE`.
1012− If you supply this argument multiple times, each *FILE* will be added
1013− to bibliography.
1328+ overriding any value set in the metadata. If you supply
1329+ this argument multiple times, each *FILE* will be added to
1330+ bibliography. If *FILE* is a URL, it will be fetched
1331+ via HTTP. If *FILE* is not found relative to the
1332+ working directory, it will be sought in the resource path
1333+ (see `--resource-path`).
10141334
10151335`--csl=`*FILE*
10161336
10171337: Set the `csl` field in the document's metadata to *FILE*,
10181338 overriding any value set in the metadata. (This is equivalent to
1019− `--metadata csl=FILE`.)
1020− This option is only relevant with `pandoc-citeproc`.
1339+ `--metadata csl=FILE`.) If *FILE* is a URL, it will be
1340+ fetched via HTTP. If *FILE* is not found relative to the
1341+ working directory, it will be sought in the resource path
1342+ (see `--resource-path`) and finally in the `csl`
1343+ subdirectory of the pandoc user data directory.
10211344
10221345`--citation-abbreviations=`*FILE*
10231346
10241347: Set the `citation-abbreviations` field in the document's metadata to
10251348 *FILE*, overriding any value set in the metadata. (This is equivalent to
10261349 `--metadata citation-abbreviations=FILE`.)
1027− This option is only relevant with `pandoc-citeproc`.
1350+ If *FILE* is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP. If *FILE* is not
1351+ found relative to the working directory, it will be sought
1352+ in the resource path (see `--resource-path`) and finally in
1353+ the `csl` subdirectory of the pandoc user data directory.
10281354
10291355`--natbib`
10301356
1031−: Use [`natbib`] for citations in LaTeX output. This option is not for use
1032− with the `pandoc-citeproc` filter or with PDF output. It is intended for
1033− use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed with [`bibtex`].
1357+: Use [`natbib`] for citations in LaTeX output. This option
1358+ is not for use with the `--citeproc` option or with PDF
1359+ output. It is intended for use in producing a LaTeX file
1360+ that can be processed with [`bibtex`].
10341361
10351362`--biblatex`
10361363
1037−: Use [`biblatex`] for citations in LaTeX output. This option is not for use
1038− with the `pandoc-citeproc` filter or with PDF output. It is intended for
1039− use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed with [`bibtex`] or [`biber`].
1040−
1041−Math rendering in HTML
1042−----------------------
1043−
1044−`-m` [*URL*], `--latexmathml`[`=`*URL*]
1364+: Use [`biblatex`] for citations in LaTeX output. This option
1365+ is not for use with the `--citeproc` option or with PDF
1366+ output. It is intended for use in producing a LaTeX file
1367+ that can be processed with [`bibtex`] or [`biber`].
10451368
1046−: Use the [LaTeXMathML] script to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
1047− To insert a link to a local copy of the `LaTeXMathML.js` script,
1048− provide a *URL*. If no *URL* is provided, the contents of the
1049− script will be inserted directly into the HTML header, preserving
1050− portability at the price of efficiency. If you plan to use math on
1051− several pages, it is much better to link to a copy of the script,
1052− so it can be cached.
1369+## Math rendering in HTML {.options}
10531370
1054−`--mathml`
1055−
1056−: Convert TeX math to [MathML] (in `docbook4`, `docbook5`, `jats`,
1057− `html4` and `html5`).
1058−
1059−`--jsmath`[`=`*URL*]
1060−
1061−: Use [jsMath] to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
1062− The *URL* should point to the jsMath load script (e.g.
1063− `jsMath/easy/load.js`); if provided, it will be linked to in
1064− the header of standalone HTML documents. If a *URL* is not provided,
1065− no link to the jsMath load script will be inserted; it is then
1066− up to the author to provide such a link in the HTML template.
1371+The default is to render TeX math as far as possible using
1372+Unicode characters. Formulas are put inside a `span` with
1373+`class="math"`, so that they may be styled differently from the
1374+surrounding text if needed. However, this gives acceptable
1375+results only for basic math, usually you will want to use
1376+`--mathjax` or another of the following options.
10671377
10681378`--mathjax`[`=`*URL*]
10691379
10701380: Use [MathJax] to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
1381+ TeX math will be put between `\(...\)` (for inline math)
1382+ or `\[...\]` (for display math) and wrapped in `<span>` tags
1383+ with class `math`. Then the MathJax JavaScript will render it.
10711384 The *URL* should point to the `MathJax.js` load script.
1072− If a *URL* is not provided, a link to the MathJax CDN will
1385+ If a *URL* is not provided, a link to the Cloudflare CDN will
10731386 be inserted.
10741387
1075−`--gladtex`
1076−
1077−: Enclose TeX math in `<eq>` tags in HTML output. These can then
1078− be processed by [gladTeX] to produce links to images of the typeset
1079− formulas.
1080−
1081−`--mimetex`[`=`*URL*]
1388+`--mathml`
10821389
1083−: Render TeX math using the [mimeTeX] CGI script. If *URL* is not
1084− specified, it is assumed that the script is at `/cgi-bin/mimetex.cgi`.
1390+: Convert TeX math to [MathML] (in `epub3`, `docbook4`,
1391+ `docbook5`, `jats`, `html4` and `html5`). This is the
1392+ default in `odt` output. Note that currently only Firefox
1393+ and Safari (and select e-book readers) natively support
1394+ MathML.
10851395
10861396`--webtex`[`=`*URL*]
10871397
1088−: Render TeX formulas using an external script that converts TeX
1089− formulas to images. The formula will be concatenated with the URL
1090− provided. If *URL* is not specified, the CodeCogs will be used.
1398+: Convert TeX formulas to `<img>` tags that link to an external script
1399+ that converts formulas to images. The formula will be URL-encoded
1400+ and concatenated with the URL provided. For SVG images you can for
1401+ example use `--webtex https://latex.codecogs.com/svg.latex?`.
1402+ If no URL is specified, the CodeCogs URL generating PNGs
1403+ will be used (`https://latex.codecogs.com/png.latex?`).
10911404 Note: the `--webtex` option will affect Markdown output
10921405 as well as HTML, which is useful if you're targeting a
10931406 version of Markdown without native math support.
@@ -1095,26 +1408,26 @@ Math rendering in HTML
10951408`--katex`[`=`*URL*]
10961409
10971410: Use [KaTeX] to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
1098− The *URL* should point to the `katex.js` load script. If a *URL* is
1099− not provided, a link to the KaTeX CDN will be inserted.
1100− Note: [KaTeX] seems to work best with `html5` output.
1411+ The *URL* is the base URL for the KaTeX library. That directory
1412+ should contain a `katex.min.js` and a `katex.min.css` file.
1413+ If a *URL* is not provided, a link to the KaTeX CDN will be inserted.
11011414
1102−`--katex-stylesheet=`*URL*
1415+`--gladtex`
1416+
1417+: Enclose TeX math in `<eq>` tags in HTML output. The resulting HTML
1418+ can then be processed by [GladTeX] to produce SVG images of the typeset
1419+ formulas and an HTML file with these images embedded.
11031420
1104−: The *URL* should point to the `katex.css` stylesheet. If this option is
1105− not specified, a link to the KaTeX CDN will be inserted. Note that this
1106− option does not imply `--katex`.
1421+ pandoc -s --gladtex input.md -o myfile.htex
1422+ gladtex -d image_dir myfile.htex
1423+ # produces myfile.html and images in image_dir
11071424
1108−[MathML]: http://www.w3.org/Math/
1109−[LaTeXMathML]: http://math.etsu.edu/LaTeXMathML/
1110−[jsMath]: http://www.math.union.edu/~dpvc/jsmath/
1425+[MathML]: https://www.w3.org/Math/
11111426[MathJax]: https://www.mathjax.org
1112−[gladTeX]: http://ans.hsh.no/home/mgg/gladtex/
1113−[mimeTeX]: http://www.forkosh.com/mimetex.html
11141427[KaTeX]: https://github.com/Khan/KaTeX
1428+[GladTeX]: https://humenda.github.io/GladTeX/
11151429
1116−Options for wrapper scripts
1117−---------------------------
1430+## Options for wrapper scripts {.options}
11181431
11191432`--dump-args`
11201433
@@ -1138,8 +1451,277 @@ Options for wrapper scripts
11381451
11391452 pandoc -o foo.html -s
11401453
1141−Templates
1142−=========
1454+# Exit codes
1455+
1456+If pandoc completes successfully, it will return exit code 0.
1457+Nonzero exit codes have the following meanings:
1458+
1459+ Code Error
1460+----- ------------------------------------
1461+ 3 PandocFailOnWarningError
1462+ 4 PandocAppError
1463+ 5 PandocTemplateError
1464+ 6 PandocOptionError
1465+ 21 PandocUnknownReaderError
1466+ 22 PandocUnknownWriterError
1467+ 23 PandocUnsupportedExtensionError
1468+ 24 PandocCiteprocError
1469+ 31 PandocEpubSubdirectoryError
1470+ 43 PandocPDFError
1471+ 44 PandocXMLError
1472+ 47 PandocPDFProgramNotFoundError
1473+ 61 PandocHttpError
1474+ 62 PandocShouldNeverHappenError
1475+ 63 PandocSomeError
1476+ 64 PandocParseError
1477+ 65 PandocParsecError
1478+ 66 PandocMakePDFError
1479+ 67 PandocSyntaxMapError
1480+ 83 PandocFilterError
1481+ 91 PandocMacroLoop
1482+ 92 PandocUTF8DecodingError
1483+ 93 PandocIpynbDecodingError
1484+ 94 PandocUnsupportedCharsetError
1485+ 97 PandocCouldNotFindDataFileError
1486+ 99 PandocResourceNotFound
1487+----- ------------------------------------
1488+
1489+# Default files
1490+
1491+The `--defaults` option may be used to specify a package
1492+of options. Here is a sample defaults file demonstrating all of
1493+the fields that may be used:
1494+
1495+``` yaml
1496+from: markdown+emoji
1497+# reader: may be used instead of from:
1498+to: html5
1499+# writer: may be used instead of to:
1500+
1501+# leave blank for output to stdout:
1502+output-file:
1503+# leave blank for input from stdin, use [] for no input:
1504+input-files:
1505+- preface.md
1506+- content.md
1507+# or you may use input-file: with a single value
1508+
1509+# Include options from the specified defaults files.
1510+# The files will be searched for first in the working directory
1511+# and then in the defaults subdirectory of the user data directory.
1512+# The files are included in the same order in which they appear in
1513+# the list. Options specified in this defaults file always have
1514+# priority over the included ones.
1515+defaults:
1516+- defsA
1517+- defsB
1518+
1519+template: letter
1520+standalone: true
1521+self-contained: false
1522+
1523+# note that structured variables may be specified:
1524+variables:
1525+ documentclass: book
1526+ classoption:
1527+ - twosides
1528+ - draft
1529+
1530+# metadata values specified here are parsed as literal
1531+# string text, not markdown:
1532+metadata:
1533+ author:
1534+ - Sam Smith
1535+ - Julie Liu
1536+metadata-files:
1537+- boilerplate.yaml
1538+# or you may use metadata-file: with a single value
1539+
1540+# Note that these take files, not their contents:
1541+include-before-body: []
1542+include-after-body: []
1543+include-in-header: []
1544+resource-path: ["."]
1545+
1546+# turn on built-in citation processing. Note that if you need
1547+# control over when the citeproc processing is done relative
1548+# to other filters, you should instead use `citeproc` in the
1549+# list of `filters` (see below).
1550+citeproc: true
1551+csl: ieee
1552+bibliography:
1553+- foobar.bib
1554+- barbaz.json
1555+citation-abbreviations: abbrevs.json
1556+
1557+# Filters will be assumed to be Lua filters if they have
1558+# the .lua extension, and json filters otherwise. But
1559+# the filter type can also be specified explicitly, as shown.
1560+# Filters are run in the order specified.
1561+# To include the built-in citeproc filter, use either `citeproc`
1562+# or `{type: citeproc}`.
1563+filters:
1564+- wordcount.lua
1565+- type: json
1566+ path: foo.lua
1567+
1568+file-scope: false
1569+
1570+data-dir:
1571+
1572+# ERROR, WARNING, or INFO
1573+verbosity: INFO
1574+log-file: log.json
1575+
1576+# citeproc, natbib, or biblatex. This only affects LaTeX
1577+# output. If you want to use citeproc to format citations,
1578+# you should also set 'citeproc: true' (see above).
1579+cite-method: citeproc
1580+
1581+# part, chapter, section, or default:
1582+top-level-division: chapter
1583+abbreviations:
1584+
1585+pdf-engine: pdflatex
1586+pdf-engine-opts:
1587+- "-shell-escape"
1588+# you may also use pdf-engine-opt: with a single option
1589+# pdf-engine-opt: "-shell-escape"
1590+
1591+# auto, preserve, or none
1592+wrap: auto
1593+columns: 78
1594+dpi: 72
1595+
1596+extract-media: mediadir
1597+
1598+table-of-contents: true
1599+toc-depth: 2
1600+number-sections: false
1601+# a list of offsets at each heading level
1602+number-offset: [0,0,0,0,0,0]
1603+# toc: may also be used instead of table-of-contents:
1604+shift-heading-level-by: 1
1605+section-divs: true
1606+identifier-prefix: foo
1607+title-prefix: ""
1608+strip-empty-paragraphs: true
1609+# lf, crlf, or native
1610+eol: lf
1611+strip-comments: false
1612+indented-code-classes: []
1613+ascii: true
1614+default-image-extension: ".jpg"
1615+
1616+# either a style name of a style definition file:
1617+highlight-style: pygments
1618+syntax-definitions:
1619+- c.xml
1620+# or you may use syntax-definition: with a single value
1621+listings: false
1622+
1623+reference-doc: myref.docx
1624+
1625+# method is plain, webtex, gladtex, mathml, mathjax, katex
1626+# you may specify a url with webtex, mathjax, katex
1627+html-math-method:
1628+ method: mathjax
1629+ url: "https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/mathjax@3/es5/tex-mml-chtml.js"
1630+# none, references, or javascript
1631+email-obfuscation: javascript
1632+
1633+tab-stop: 8
1634+preserve-tabs: true
1635+
1636+incremental: false
1637+slide-level: 2
1638+
1639+epub-subdirectory: EPUB
1640+epub-metadata: meta.xml
1641+epub-fonts:
1642+- foobar.otf
1643+epub-chapter-level: 1
1644+epub-cover-image: cover.jpg
1645+
1646+reference-links: true
1647+# block, section, or document
1648+reference-location: block
1649+markdown-headings: setext
1650+
1651+# accept, reject, or all
1652+track-changes: accept
1653+
1654+html-q-tags: false
1655+css:
1656+- site.css
1657+
1658+# none, all, or best
1659+ipynb-output: best
1660+
1661+# A list of two-element lists
1662+request-headers:
1663+- ["User-Agent", "Mozilla/5.0"]
1664+
1665+fail-if-warnings: false
1666+dump-args: false
1667+ignore-args: false
1668+trace: false
1669+```
1670+
1671+Fields that are omitted will just have their regular
1672+default values. So a defaults file can be as simple as
1673+one line:
1674+
1675+``` yaml
1676+verbosity: INFO
1677+```
1678+
1679+In fields that expect a file path (or list of file paths), the
1680+following syntax may be used to interpolate environment variables:
1681+
1682+``` yaml
1683+csl: ${HOME}/mycsldir/special.csl
1684+```
1685+
1686+`${USERDATA}` may also be used; this will always resolve to the
1687+user data directory that is current when the defaults file is
1688+parsed, regardless of the setting of the environment
1689+variable `USERDATA`.
1690+
1691+`${.}` will resolve to the directory containing the default
1692+file itself. This allows you to refer to resources contained
1693+in that directory:
1694+
1695+``` yaml
1696+epub-cover-image: ${.}/cover.jpg
1697+epub-metadata: ${.}/meta.xml
1698+resource-path:
1699+- . # the working directory from which pandoc is run
1700+- ${.}/images # the images subdirectory of the directory
1701+ # containing this defaults file
1702+```
1703+
1704+This environment variable interpolation syntax *only* works in
1705+fields that expect file paths.
1706+
1707+Default files can be placed in the `defaults` subdirectory of
1708+the user data directory and used from any directory. For
1709+example, one could create a file specifying defaults for writing
1710+letters, save it as `letter.yaml` in the `defaults` subdirectory
1711+of the user data directory, and then invoke these defaults
1712+from any directory using `pandoc --defaults letter`
1713+or `pandoc -dletter`.
1714+
1715+When multiple defaults are used, their contents will be combined.
1716+
1717+Note that, where command-line arguments may be repeated
1718+(`--metadata-file`, `--css`, `--include-in-header`,
1719+`--include-before-body`, `--include-after-body`, `--variable`,
1720+`--metadata`, `--syntax-definition`), the values specified on
1721+the command line will combine with values specified in the
1722+defaults file, rather than replacing them.
1723+
1724+# Templates
11431725
11441726When the `-s/--standalone` option is used, pandoc uses a template to
11451727add header and footer material that is needed for a self-standing
@@ -1156,692 +1738,1592 @@ directory (see `--data-dir`, above). *Exceptions:*
11561738- For `odt` output, customize the `default.opendocument`
11571739 template.
11581740- For `pdf` output, customize the `default.latex` template
1159− (or the `default.beamer` template, if you use `-t beamer`,
1160− or the `default.context` template, if you use `-t context`).
1161−- `docx` has no template (however, you can use
1741+ (or the `default.context` template, if you use `-t context`,
1742+ or the `default.ms` template, if you use `-t ms`, or the
1743+ `default.html` template, if you use `-t html`).
1744+- `docx` and `pptx` have no template (however, you can use
11621745 `--reference-doc` to customize the output).
11631746
11641747Templates contain *variables*, which allow for the inclusion of
1165−arbitrary information at any point in the file. Variables may be set
1166−within the document using [YAML metadata blocks][Extension:
1167−`yaml_metadata_block`]. They may also be set at the
1168−command line using the `-V/--variable` option: variables set in this
1169−way override metadata fields with the same name.
1748+arbitrary information at any point in the file. They may be set at the
1749+command line using the `-V/--variable` option. If a variable is not set,
1750+pandoc will look for the key in the document's metadata, which can be set
1751+using either [YAML metadata blocks][Extension: `yaml_metadata_block`]
1752+or with the `-M/--metadata` option. In addition, some variables
1753+are given default values by pandoc. See [Variables] below for
1754+a list of variables used in pandoc's default templates.
11701755
1171−Variables set by pandoc
1172−-----------------------
1756+If you use custom templates, you may need to revise them as pandoc
1757+changes. We recommend tracking the changes in the default templates,
1758+and modifying your custom templates accordingly. An easy way to do this
1759+is to fork the [pandoc-templates] repository and merge in
1760+changes after each pandoc release.
11731761
1174−Some variables are set automatically by pandoc. These vary somewhat
1175−depending on the output format, but include metadata fields as well
1176−as the following:
1762+ [pandoc-templates]: https://github.com/jgm/pandoc-templates
11771763
1178−`sourcefile`, `outputfile`
1179−: source and destination filenames, as given on the command line.
1180− `sourcefile` can also be a list if input comes from multiple files, or empty
1181− if input is from stdin. You can use the following snippet in your template
1182− to distinguish them:
1764+## Template syntax
11831765
1184− $if(sourcefile)$
1185− $for(sourcefile)$
1186− $sourcefile$
1187− $endfor$
1188− $else$
1189− (stdin)
1190− $endif$
1766+### Comments
11911767
1192− Similarly, `outputfile` can be `-` if output goes to the terminal.
1768+Anything between the sequence `$--` and the end of the
1769+line will be treated as a comment and omitted from the output.
11931770
1194−`title`, `author`, `date`
1195−: allow identification of basic aspects of the document. Included
1196− in PDF metadata through LaTeX and ConTeXt. These can be set
1197− through a [pandoc title block][Extension: `pandoc_title_block`],
1198− which allows for multiple authors, or through a YAML metadata block:
1771+### Delimiters
11991772
1200− ---
1201− author:
1202− - Aristotle
1203− - Peter Abelard
1204− ...
1773+To mark variables and control structures in the template,
1774+either `$`...`$` or `${`...`}` may be used as delimiters.
1775+The styles may also be mixed in the same template, but the
1776+opening and closing delimiter must match in each case. The
1777+opening delimiter may be followed by one or more spaces
1778+or tabs, which will be ignored. The closing delimiter may
1779+be followed by one or more spaces or tabs, which will be
1780+ignored.
12051781
1206−`subtitle`
1207−: document subtitle, included in HTML, EPUB, LaTeX, ConTeXt, and Word docx;
1208− renders in LaTeX only when using a document class that supports
1209− `\subtitle`, such as `beamer` or the [KOMA-Script] series (`scrartcl`,
1210− `scrreprt`, `scrbook`).[^subtitle]
1782+To include a literal `$` in the document, use `$$`.
12111783
1212−`institute`
1213−: author affiliations (in LaTeX and Beamer only). Can be a
1214− list, when there are multiple authors.
1784+### Interpolated variables
12151785
1216−`abstract`
1217−: document summary, included in LaTeX, ConTeXt, AsciiDoc, and Word docx
1786+A slot for an interpolated variable is a variable name surrounded
1787+by matched delimiters. Variable names must begin with a letter
1788+and can contain letters, numbers, `_`, `-`, and `.`. The
1789+keywords `it`, `if`, `else`, `endif`, `for`, `sep`, and `endfor` may
1790+not be used as variable names. Examples:
12181791
1219−`keywords`
1220−: list of keywords to be included in HTML, PDF, and AsciiDoc metadata;
1221− may be repeated as for `author`, above
1792+```
1793+$foo$
1794+$foo.bar.baz$
1795+$foo_bar.baz-bim$
1796+$ foo $
1797+${foo}
1798+${foo.bar.baz}
1799+${foo_bar.baz-bim}
1800+${ foo }
1801+```
12221802
1223−`header-includes`
1224−: contents specified by `-H/--include-in-header` (may have multiple
1225− values)
1803+Variable names with periods are used to get at structured
1804+variable values. So, for example, `employee.salary` will return the
1805+value of the `salary` field of the object that is the value of
1806+the `employee` field.
12261807
1227−`toc`
1228−: non-null value if `--toc/--table-of-contents` was specified
1808+- If the value of the variable is simple value, it will be
1809+ rendered verbatim. (Note that no escaping is done;
1810+ the assumption is that the calling program will escape
1811+ the strings appropriately for the output format.)
1812+- If the value is a list, the values will be concatenated.
1813+- If the value is a map, the string `true` will be rendered.
1814+- Every other value will be rendered as the empty string.
12291815
1230−`toc-title`
1231−: title of table of contents (works only with EPUB,
1232− opendocument, odt, docx)
1816+### Conditionals
12331817
1234−`include-before`
1235−: contents specified by `-B/--include-before-body` (may have
1236− multiple values)
1818+A conditional begins with `if(variable)` (enclosed in
1819+matched delimiters) and ends with `endif` (enclosed in matched
1820+delimiters). It may optionally contain an `else` (enclosed in
1821+matched delimiters). The `if` section is used if
1822+`variable` has a non-empty value, otherwise the `else`
1823+section is used (if present). Examples:
12371824
1238−`include-after`
1239−: contents specified by `-A/--include-after-body` (may have
1240− multiple values)
1825+```
1826+$if(foo)$bar$endif$
12411827
1242−`body`
1243−: body of document
1828+$if(foo)$
1829+ $foo$
1830+$endif$
12441831
1245−`meta-json`
1246−: JSON representation of all of the document's metadata. Field
1247− values are transformed to the selected output format.
1832+$if(foo)$
1833+part one
1834+$else$
1835+part two
1836+$endif$
12481837
1249−[^subtitle]: To make `subtitle` work with other LaTeX
1250− document classes, you can add the following to `header-includes`:
1838+${if(foo)}bar${endif}
12511839
1252− \providecommand{\subtitle}[1]{%
1253− \usepackage{titling}
1254− \posttitle{%
1255− \par\large#1\end{center}}
1256− }
1840+${if(foo)}
1841+ ${foo}
1842+${endif}
12571843
1258−Language variables
1259−------------------
1844+${if(foo)}
1845+${ foo.bar }
1846+${else}
1847+no foo!
1848+${endif}
1849+```
12601850
1261−`lang`
1262−: identifies the main language of the document,
1263− using a code according to [BCP 47] (e.g. `en` or `en-GB`).
1264− For some output formats, pandoc will convert it to an appropriate
1265− format stored in the additional variables `babel-lang`,
1266− `polyglossia-lang` (LaTeX) and `context-lang` (ConTeXt).
1267−
1268− Native pandoc `span`s and `div`s with the lang attribute
1269− (value in BCP 47) can be used to switch the language in
1270− that range.
1271−
1272−`otherlangs`
1273−: a list of other languages used in the document
1274− in the YAML metadata, according to [BCP 47]. For example:
1275− `otherlangs: [en-GB, fr]`.
1276− This is automatically generated from the `lang` attributes
1277− in all `span`s and `div`s but can be overridden.
1278− Currently only used by LaTeX through the generated
1279− `babel-otherlangs` and `polyglossia-otherlangs` variables.
1280− The LaTeX writer outputs polyglossia commands in the text but
1281− the `babel-newcommands` variable contains mappings for them
1282− to the corresponding babel.
1851+The keyword `elseif` may be used to simplify complex nested
1852+conditionals:
12831853
1284−`dir`
1285−: the base direction of the document, either `rtl` (right-to-left)
1286− or `ltr` (left-to-right).
1854+```
1855+$if(foo)$
1856+XXX
1857+$elseif(bar)$
1858+YYY
1859+$else$
1860+ZZZ
1861+$endif$
1862+```
12871863
1288− For bidirectional documents, native pandoc `span`s and `div`s
1289− with the `dir` attribute (value `rtl` or `ltr`) can be used to
1290− override the base direction in some output formats.
1291− This may not always be necessary if the final renderer
1292− (e.g. the browser, when generating HTML) supports the
1293− [Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm].
1864+### For loops
12941865
1295− When using LaTeX for bidirectional documents, only the `xelatex` engine
1296− is fully supported (use `--latex-engine=xelatex`).
1866+A for loop begins with `for(variable)` (enclosed in
1867+matched delimiters) and ends with `endfor` (enclosed in matched
1868+delimiters.
12971869
1298−[BCP 47]: https://tools.ietf.org/html/bcp47
1299−[Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm]: http://www.w3.org/International/articles/inline-bidi-markup/uba-basics
1870+- If `variable` is an array, the material inside the loop will
1871+ be evaluated repeatedly, with `variable` being set to each
1872+ value of the array in turn, and concatenated.
1873+- If `variable` is a map, the material inside will be set to
1874+ the map.
1875+- If the value of the associated variable is not an array or
1876+ a map, a single iteration will be performed on its value.
13001877
1301−Variables for slides
1302−--------------------
1878+Examples:
13031879
1304−Variables are available for [producing slide shows with pandoc],
1305−including all [reveal.js configuration options].
1880+```
1881+$for(foo)$$foo$$sep$, $endfor$
13061882
1307−`titlegraphic`
1308−: title graphic for Beamer documents
1883+$for(foo)$
1884+ - $foo.last$, $foo.first$
1885+$endfor$
13091886
1310−`logo`
1311−: logo for Beamer documents
1887+${ for(foo.bar) }
1888+ - ${ foo.bar.last }, ${ foo.bar.first }
1889+${ endfor }
13121890
1313−`slidy-url`
1314−: base URL for Slidy documents (defaults to
1315− `http://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2`)
1891+$for(mymap)$
1892+$it.name$: $it.office$
1893+$endfor$
1894+```
13161895
1317−`slideous-url`
1318−: base URL for Slideous documents (defaults to `slideous`)
1896+You may optionally specify a separator between consecutive
1897+values using `sep` (enclosed in matched delimiters). The
1898+material between `sep` and the `endfor` is the separator.
13191899
1320−`s5-url`
1321−: base URL for S5 documents (defaults to `s5/default`)
1900+```
1901+${ for(foo) }${ foo }${ sep }, ${ endfor }
1902+```
13221903
1323−`revealjs-url`
1324−: base URL for reveal.js documents (defaults to `reveal.js`)
1904+Instead of using `variable` inside the loop, the special
1905+anaphoric keyword `it` may be used.
13251906
1326−`theme`, `colortheme`, `fonttheme`, `innertheme`, `outertheme`
1327−: themes for LaTeX [`beamer`] documents
1907+```
1908+${ for(foo.bar) }
1909+ - ${ it.last }, ${ it.first }
1910+${ endfor }
1911+```
13281912
1329−`themeoptions`
1330−: options for LaTeX beamer themes (a list).
1913+### Partials
13311914
1332−`navigation`
1333−: controls navigation symbols in `beamer` documents
1334− (default is `empty` for no navigation symbols; other valid values
1335− are `frame`, `vertical`, and `horizontal`).
1915+Partials (subtemplates stored in different files) may be
1916+included by using the name of the partial, followed
1917+by `()`, for example:
13361918
1337−`section-titles`
1338−: enables on "title pages" for new sections in `beamer`
1339− documents (default = true).
1919+```
1920+${ styles() }
1921+```
13401922
1341−`beamerarticle`
1342−: when true, the `beamerarticle` package is loaded (for
1343− producing an article from beamer slides).
1923+Partials will be sought in the directory containing
1924+the main template. The file name will be assumed to
1925+have the same extension as the main template if it
1926+lacks an extension. When calling the partial, the
1927+full name including file extension can also be used:
13441928
1345−`colorlinks`
1346−: add color to link text; automatically enabled if any of `linkcolor`, `citecolor`,
1347− `urlcolor`, or `toccolor` are set (for beamer only).
1929+```
1930+${ styles.html() }
1931+```
13481932
1349−`linkcolor`, `citecolor`, `urlcolor`, `toccolor`
1350−: color for internal links, citation links, external links, and links in table
1351− of contents: uses any of the [predefined LaTeX colors] (for beamer only).
1933+(If a partial is not found in the directory of the
1934+template and the template path is given as a relative
1935+path, it will also be sought in the `templates`
1936+subdirectory of the user data directory.)
13521937
1353−`aspectratio`
1354−: aspect ratio of slides (for beamer only, `1610` for 16:10, `169` for 16:9,
1355− `149` for 14:9, `141` for 1.41:1, `54` for 5:4, `43` for 4:3 which is the
1356− default, and `32` for 3:2).
1938+Partials may optionally be applied to variables using
1939+a colon:
13571940
1358−[reveal.js configuration options]: https://github.com/hakimel/reveal.js#configuration
1941+```
1942+${ date:fancy() }
13591943
1360−Variables for LaTeX
1361−-------------------
1944+${ articles:bibentry() }
1945+```
13621946
1363−LaTeX variables are used when [creating a PDF].
1947+If `articles` is an array, this will iterate over its
1948+values, applying the partial `bibentry()` to each one. So the
1949+second example above is equivalent to
13641950
1365−`papersize`
1366−: paper size, e.g. `letter`, `a4`
1951+```
1952+${ for(articles) }
1953+${ it:bibentry() }
1954+${ endfor }
1955+```
13671956
1368−`fontsize`
1369−: font size for body text (e.g. `10pt`, `12pt`)
1957+Note that the anaphoric keyword `it` must be used when
1958+iterating over partials. In the above examples,
1959+the `bibentry` partial should contain `it.title`
1960+(and so on) instead of `articles.title`.
13701961
1371−`documentclass`
1372−: document class, e.g. [`article`], [`report`], [`book`], [`memoir`]
1962+Final newlines are omitted from included partials.
13731963
1374−`classoption`
1375−: option for document class, e.g. `oneside`; may be repeated
1376− for multiple options
1964+Partials may include other partials.
13771965
1378−`geometry`
1379−: option for [`geometry`] package, e.g. `margin=1in`;
1380− may be repeated for multiple options
1966+A separator between values of an array may be specified
1967+in square brackets, immediately after the variable name
1968+or partial:
13811969
1382−`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
1383−: sets margins, if `geometry` is not used (otherwise `geometry`
1384− overrides these)
1970+```
1971+${months[, ]}$
13851972
1386−`linestretch`
1387−: adjusts line spacing using the [`setspace`]
1388− package, e.g. `1.25`, `1.5`
1973+${articles:bibentry()[; ]$
1974+```
13891975
1390−`fontfamily`
1391−: font package for use with `pdflatex`:
1392− [TeX Live] includes many options, documented in the [LaTeX Font Catalogue].
1393− The default is [Latin Modern][`lm`].
1976+The separator in this case is literal and (unlike with `sep`
1977+in an explicit `for` loop) cannot contain interpolated
1978+variables or other template directives.
13941979
1395−`fontfamilyoptions`
1396−: options for package used as `fontfamily`: e.g. `osf,sc` with
1397− `fontfamily` set to [`mathpazo`] provides Palatino with old-style
1398− figures and true small caps; may be repeated for multiple options
1980+### Nesting
13991981
1400−`mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`, `CJKmainfont`
1401−: font families for use with `xelatex` or
1402− `lualatex`: take the name of any system font, using the
1403− [`fontspec`] package. Note that if `CJKmainfont` is used,
1404− the [`xecjk`] package must be available.
1982+To ensure that content is "nested," that is, subsequent lines
1983+indented, use the `^` directive:
14051984
1406−`mainfontoptions`, `sansfontoptions`, `monofontoptions`, `mathfontoptions`, `CJKoptions`
1407−: options to use with `mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`,
1408− `CJKmainfont` in `xelatex` and `lualatex`. Allow for any choices
1409− available through [`fontspec`], such as the OpenType features
1410− `Numbers=OldStyle,Numbers=Proportional`. May be repeated for multiple options.
1985+```
1986+$item.number$ $^$$item.description$ ($item.price$)
1987+```
14111988
1412−`fontenc`
1413−: allows font encoding to be specified through `fontenc` package (with `pdflatex`);
1414− default is `T1` (see guide to [LaTeX font encodings])
1989+In this example, if `item.description` has multiple lines,
1990+they will all be indented to line up with the first line:
14151991
1416−`microtypeoptions`
1417−: options to pass to the microtype package
1992+```
1993+00123 A fine bottle of 18-year old
1994+ Oban whiskey. ($148)
1995+```
14181996
1419−`colorlinks`
1420−: add color to link text; automatically enabled if any of `linkcolor`, `citecolor`,
1421− `urlcolor`, or `toccolor` are set
1997+To nest multiple lines to the same level, align them
1998+with the `^` directive in the template. For example:
14221999
1423−`linkcolor`, `citecolor`, `urlcolor`, `toccolor`
1424−: color for internal links, citation links, external links, and links in table of contents:
1425− uses any of the [predefined LaTeX colors]
2000+```
2001+$item.number$ $^$$item.description$ ($item.price$)
2002+ (Available til $item.sellby$.)
2003+```
14262004
1427−`links-as-notes`
1428−: causes links to be printed as footnotes
2005+will produce
14292006
1430−`indent`
1431−: uses document class settings for indentation (the default LaTeX template
1432− otherwise removes indentation and adds space between paragraphs)
2007+```
2008+00123 A fine bottle of 18-year old
2009+ Oban whiskey. ($148)
2010+ (Available til March 30, 2020.)
2011+```
14332012
1434−`subparagraph`
1435−: disables default behavior of LaTeX template that redefines (sub)paragraphs
1436− as sections, changing the appearance of nested headings in some classes
2013+If a variable occurs by itself on a line, preceded by whitespace
2014+and not followed by further text or directives on the same line,
2015+and the variable's value contains multiple lines, it will be
2016+nested automatically.
14372017
1438−`thanks`
1439−: specifies contents of acknowledgments footnote after document title.
2018+### Breakable spaces
14402019
1441−`toc`
1442−: include table of contents (can also be set using `--toc/--table-of-contents`)
2020+Normally, spaces in the template itself (as opposed to values of
2021+the interpolated variables) are not breakable, but they can be
2022+made breakable in part of the template by using the `~` keyword
2023+(ended with another `~`).
14432024
1444−`toc-depth`
1445−: level of section to include in table of contents
2025+```
2026+$~$This long line may break if the document is rendered
2027+with a short line length.$~$
2028+```
14462029
1447−`secnumdepth`
1448−: numbering depth for sections, if sections are numbered
2030+### Pipes
14492031
1450−`lof`, `lot`
1451−: include list of figures, list of tables
2032+A pipe transforms the value of a variable or partial. Pipes are
2033+specified using a slash (`/`) between the variable name (or partial)
2034+and the pipe name. Example:
14522035
1453−`bibliography`
1454−: bibliography to use for resolving references
2036+```
2037+$for(name)$
2038+$name/uppercase$
2039+$endfor$
14552040
1456−`biblio-style`
1457−: bibliography style, when used with `--natbib` and `--biblatex`.
2041+$for(metadata/pairs)$
2042+- $it.key$: $it.value$
2043+$endfor$
14582044
1459−`biblio-title`
1460−: bibliography title, when used with `--natbib` and `--biblatex`.
2045+$employee:name()/uppercase$
2046+```
14612047
1462−`biblatexoptions`
1463−: list of options for biblatex.
2048+Pipes may be chained:
14642049
1465−`natbiboptions`
1466−: list of options for natbib.
2050+```
2051+$for(employees/pairs)$
2052+$it.key/alpha/uppercase$. $it.name$
2053+$endfor$
2054+```
14672055
1468−[`article`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/article
1469−[`report`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/report
1470−[`book`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/book
1471−[KOMA-Script]: https://ctan.org/pkg/koma-script
1472−[`memoir`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/memoir
1473−[predefined LaTeX colors]: https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX/Colors#Predefined_colors
1474−[LaTeX Font Catalogue]: http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/
1475−[`mathpazo`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/mathpazo
1476−[LaTeX font encodings]: https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide
2056+Some pipes take parameters:
14772057
1478−Variables for ConTeXt
1479−---------------------
2058+```
2059+|----------------------|------------|
2060+$for(employee)$
2061+$it.name.first/uppercase/left 20 "| "$$it.name.salary/right 10 " | " " |"$
2062+$endfor$
2063+|----------------------|------------|
2064+```
14802065
1481−`papersize`
1482−: paper size, e.g. `letter`, `A4`, `landscape` (see [ConTeXt Paper Setup]);
1483− may be repeated for multiple options
2066+Currently the following pipes are predefined:
14842067
1485−`layout`
1486−: options for page margins and text arrangement (see [ConTeXt Layout]);
1487− may be repeated for multiple options
2068+- `pairs`: Converts a map or array to an array of maps,
2069+ each with `key` and `value` fields. If the original
2070+ value was an array, the `key` will be the array index,
2071+ starting with 1.
14882072
1489−`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
1490−: sets margins, if `layout` is not used (otherwise `layout`
1491− overrides these)
2073+- `uppercase`: Converts text to uppercase.
14922074
1493−`fontsize`
1494−: font size for body text (e.g. `10pt`, `12pt`)
2075+- `lowercase`: Converts text to lowercase.
14952076
1496−`mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`
1497−: font families: take the name of any system font (see [ConTeXt Font Switching])
2077+- `length`: Returns the length of the value: number
2078+ of characters for a textual value, number of elements
2079+ for a map or array.
14982080
1499−`linkcolor`, `contrastcolor`
1500−: color for links outside and inside a page, e.g. `red`, `blue` (see [ConTeXt Color])
2081+- `reverse`: Reverses a textual value or array,
2082+ and has no effect on other values.
15012083
1502−`linkstyle`
1503−: typeface style for links, e.g. `normal`, `bold`, `slanted`, `boldslanted`, `type`, `cap`, `small`
2084+- `first`: Returns the first value of an array, if
2085+ applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns
2086+ the original value.
15042087
1505−`indenting`
1506−: controls indentation of paragraphs, e.g. `yes,small,next` (see [ConTeXt Indentation]);
1507− may be repeated for multiple options
2088+- `last`: Returns the last value of an array, if
2089+ applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns
2090+ the original value.
15082091
1509−`whitespace`
1510−: spacing between paragraphs, e.g. `none`, `small` (using [`setupwhitespace`])
2092+- `rest`: Returns all but the first value of an array, if
2093+ applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns
2094+ the original value.
15112095
1512−`interlinespace`
1513−: adjusts line spacing, e.g. `4ex` (using [`setupinterlinespace`]);
1514− may be repeated for multiple options
2096+- `allbutlast`: Returns all but the last value of an array, if
2097+ applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns
2098+ the original value.
15152099
1516−`headertext`, `footertext`
1517−: text to be placed in running header or footer (see [ConTeXt Headers and Footers]);
1518− may be repeated up to four times for different placement
2100+- `chomp`: Removes trailing newlines (and breakable space).
15192101
1520−`pagenumbering`
1521−: page number style and location (using [`setuppagenumbering`]);
1522− may be repeated for multiple options
2102+- `nowrap`: Disables line wrapping on breakable spaces.
15232103
1524−`toc`
1525−: include table of contents (can also be set using `--toc/--table-of-contents`)
2104+- `alpha`: Converts textual values that can be
2105+ read as an integer into lowercase alphabetic
2106+ characters `a..z` (mod 26). This can be used to get lettered
2107+ enumeration from array indices. To get uppercase
2108+ letters, chain with `uppercase`.
15262109
1527−`lof`, `lot`
1528−: include list of figures, list of tables
2110+- `roman`: Converts textual values that can be
2111+ read as an integer into lowercase roman numerials.
2112+ This can be used to get lettered enumeration from array indices.
2113+ To get uppercase roman, chain with `uppercase`.
15292114
1530−[ConTeXt Paper Setup]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/PaperSetup
1531−[ConTeXt Layout]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Layout
1532−[ConTeXt Font Switching]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Font_Switching
1533−[ConTeXt Color]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Color
1534−[ConTeXt Headers and Footers]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Headers_and_Footers
1535−[ConTeXt Indentation]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Indentation
1536−[`setupwhitespace`]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setupwhitespace
1537−[`setupinterlinespace`]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setupinterlinespace
1538−[`setuppagenumbering`]: http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setuppagenumbering
2115+- `left n "leftborder" "rightborder"`: Renders a textual value
2116+ in a block of width `n`, aligned to the left, with an optional
2117+ left and right border. Has no effect on other values. This
2118+ can be used to align material in tables. Widths are positive
2119+ integers indicating the number of characters. Borders
2120+ are strings inside double quotes; literal `"` and `\` characters
2121+ must be backslash-escaped.
15392122
1540−Variables for man pages
1541−-----------------------
2123+- `right n "leftborder" "rightborder"`: Renders a textual value
2124+ in a block of width `n`, aligned to the right, and has no
2125+ effect on other values.
15422126
1543−`section`
1544−: section number in man pages
2127+- `center n "leftborder" "rightborder"`: Renders a textual
2128+ value in a block of width `n`, aligned to the center, and has
2129+ no effect on other values.
15452130
1546−`header`
1547−: header in man pages
15482131
1549−`footer`
1550−: footer in man pages
2132+## Variables
15512133
1552−`adjusting`
1553−: adjusts text to left (`l`), right (`r`), center (`c`),
1554− or both (`b`) margins
2134+### Metadata variables
15552135
1556−`hyphenate`
1557−: if `true` (the default), hyphenation will be used
2136+`title`, `author`, `date`
2137+: allow identification of basic aspects of the document. Included
2138+ in PDF metadata through LaTeX and ConTeXt. These can be set
2139+ through a [pandoc title block][Extension: `pandoc_title_block`],
2140+ which allows for multiple authors, or through a
2141+ [YAML metadata block][Extension: `yaml_metadata_block`]:
15582142
1559−Variables for ms
1560−----------------
2143+ ---
2144+ author:
2145+ - Aristotle
2146+ - Peter Abelard
2147+ ...
15612148
1562−`pointsize`
1563−: point size (e.g. `10p`)
2149+ Note that if you just want to set PDF or HTML metadata, without
2150+ including a title block in the document itself, you can
2151+ set the `title-meta`, `author-meta`, and `date-meta`
2152+ variables. (By default these are set automatically, based
2153+ on `title`, `author`, and `date`.) The page title in HTML
2154+ is set by `pagetitle`, which is equal to `title` by default.
15642155
1565−`lineheight`
1566−: line height (e.g. `12p`)
2156+`subtitle`
2157+: document subtitle, included in HTML, EPUB, LaTeX, ConTeXt, and docx
2158+ documents
15672159
1568−`fontfamily`
1569−: font family (e.g. `T` or `P`)
2160+`abstract`
2161+: document summary, included in LaTeX, ConTeXt, AsciiDoc, and docx
2162+ documents
15702163
1571−`indent`
1572−: paragraph indent (e.g. `2m`)
2164+`keywords`
2165+: list of keywords to be included in HTML, PDF, ODT, pptx, docx
2166+ and AsciiDoc metadata; repeat as for `author`, above
15732167
1574−Using variables in templates
1575−----------------------------
2168+`subject`
2169+: document subject, included in ODT, PDF, docx and pptx metadata
15762170
1577−Variable names are sequences of alphanumerics, `-`, and `_`,
1578−starting with a letter. A variable name surrounded by `$` signs
1579−will be replaced by its value. For example, the string `$title$` in
2171+`description`
2172+: document description, included in ODT, docx and pptx metadata. Some
2173+ applications show this as `Comments` metadata.
15802174
1581− <title>$title$</title>
2175+`category`
2176+: document category, included in docx and pptx metadata
15822177
1583−will be replaced by the document title.
2178+Additionally,
2179+any root-level string metadata, not included in ODT, docx
2180+or pptx metadata is added as a *custom property*.
2181+The following [YAML] metadata block for instance:
15842182
1585−To write a literal `$` in a template, use `$$`.
2183+ ---
2184+ title: 'This is the title'
2185+ subtitle: "This is the subtitle"
2186+ author:
2187+ - Author One
2188+ - Author Two
2189+ description: |
2190+ This is a long
2191+ description.
15862192
1587−Templates may contain conditionals. The syntax is as follows:
2193+ It consists of two paragraphs
2194+ ...
15882195
1589− $if(variable)$
1590− X
1591− $else$
1592− Y
1593− $endif$
2196+will include `title`, `author` and `description` as standard document
2197+properties and `subtitle` as a custom property when converting to docx,
2198+ODT or pptx.
15942199
1595−This will include `X` in the template if `variable` has a non-null
1596−value; otherwise it will include `Y`. `X` and `Y` are placeholders for
1597−any valid template text, and may include interpolated variables or other
1598−conditionals. The `$else$` section may be omitted.
2200+### Language variables
15992201
1600−When variables can have multiple values (for example, `author` in
1601−a multi-author document), you can use the `$for$` keyword:
2202+`lang`
2203+: identifies the main language of the document using IETF language
2204+ tags (following the [BCP 47] standard), such as `en` or `en-GB`.
2205+ The [Language subtag lookup] tool can look up or verify these tags.
2206+ This affects most formats, and controls hyphenation in PDF output
2207+ when using LaTeX (through [`babel`] and [`polyglossia`]) or ConTeXt.
16022208
1603− $for(author)$
1604− <meta name="author" content="$author$" />
1605− $endfor$
2209+ Use native pandoc [Divs and Spans] with the `lang` attribute to
2210+ switch the language:
16062211
1607−You can optionally specify a separator to be used between
1608−consecutive items:
2212+ ---
2213+ lang: en-GB
2214+ ...
16092215
1610− $for(author)$$author$$sep$, $endfor$
2216+ Text in the main document language (British English).
16112217
1612−A dot can be used to select a field of a variable that takes
1613−an object as its value. So, for example:
2218+ ::: {lang=fr-CA}
2219+ > Cette citation est écrite en français canadien.
2220+ :::
16142221
1615− $author.name$ ($author.affiliation$)
2222+ More text in English. ['Zitat auf Deutsch.']{lang=de}
16162223
1617−If you use custom templates, you may need to revise them as pandoc
1618−changes. We recommend tracking the changes in the default templates,
1619−and modifying your custom templates accordingly. An easy way to do this
1620−is to fork the [pandoc-templates] repository and merge in changes after each
1621−pandoc release.
2224+`dir`
2225+: the base script direction, either `rtl` (right-to-left)
2226+ or `ltr` (left-to-right).
16222227
1623−[pandoc-templates]: https://github.com/jgm/pandoc-templates
2228+ For bidirectional documents, native pandoc `span`s and
2229+ `div`s with the `dir` attribute (value `rtl` or `ltr`) can
2230+ be used to override the base direction in some output
2231+ formats. This may not always be necessary if the final
2232+ renderer (e.g. the browser, when generating HTML) supports
2233+ the [Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm].
16242234
1625−Pandoc's Markdown
1626−=================
2235+ When using LaTeX for bidirectional documents, only the
2236+ `xelatex` engine is fully supported (use
2237+ `--pdf-engine=xelatex`).
16272238
1628−Pandoc understands an extended and slightly revised version of
1629−John Gruber's [Markdown] syntax. This document explains the syntax,
1630−noting differences from standard Markdown. Except where noted, these
1631−differences can be suppressed by using the `markdown_strict` format instead
1632−of `markdown`. An extensions can be enabled by adding `+EXTENSION`
1633−to the format name and disabled by adding `-EXTENSION`. For example,
1634−`markdown_strict+footnotes` is strict Markdown with footnotes
1635−enabled, while `markdown-footnotes-pipe_tables` is pandoc's
1636−Markdown without footnotes or pipe tables.
2239+[BCP 47]: https://tools.ietf.org/html/bcp47
2240+[Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm]: https://www.w3.org/International/articles/inline-bidi-markup/uba-basics
2241+[Language subtag lookup]: https://r12a.github.io/app-subtags/
16372242
1638−Philosophy
1639−----------
2243+### Variables for HTML
16402244
1641−Markdown is designed to be easy to write, and, even more importantly,
1642−easy to read:
2245+`document-css`
2246+: Enables inclusion of most of the [CSS] in the `styles.html`
2247+ [partial](#partials) (have a look with
2248+ `pandoc --print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html`).
2249+ Unless you use [`--css`](#option--css), this variable
2250+ is set to `true` by default. You can disable it with
2251+ e.g. `pandoc -M document-css=false`.
16432252
1644−> A Markdown-formatted document should be publishable as-is, as plain
1645−> text, without looking like it's been marked up with tags or formatting
1646−> instructions.
1647−> -- [John Gruber](http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/syntax#philosophy)
2253+`mainfont`
2254+: sets the CSS `font-family` property on the `html` element.
16482255
1649−This principle has guided pandoc's decisions in finding syntax for
1650−tables, footnotes, and other extensions.
2256+`fontsize`
2257+: sets the base CSS `font-size`, which you'd usually set
2258+ to e.g. `20px`, but it also accepts `pt`
2259+ (12pt = 16px in most browsers).
16512260
1652−There is, however, one respect in which pandoc's aims are different
1653−from the original aims of Markdown. Whereas Markdown was originally
1654−designed with HTML generation in mind, pandoc is designed for multiple
1655−output formats. Thus, while pandoc allows the embedding of raw HTML,
1656−it discourages it, and provides other, non-HTMLish ways of representing
1657−important document elements like definition lists, tables, mathematics, and
1658−footnotes.
2261+`fontcolor`
2262+: sets the CSS `color` property on the `html` element.
16592263
1660−Paragraphs
1661−----------
2264+`linkcolor`
2265+: sets the CSS `color` property on all links.
16622266
1663−A paragraph is one or more lines of text followed by one or more blank lines.
1664−Newlines are treated as spaces, so you can reflow your paragraphs as you like.
1665−If you need a hard line break, put two or more spaces at the end of a line.
2267+`monofont`
2268+: sets the CSS `font-family` property on `code` elements.
16662269
1667−#### Extension: `escaped_line_breaks` ####
2270+`monobackgroundcolor`
2271+: sets the CSS `background-color` property on `code` elements
2272+ and adds extra padding.
16682273
1669−A backslash followed by a newline is also a hard line break.
1670−Note: in multiline and grid table cells, this is the only way
1671−to create a hard line break, since trailing spaces in the cells
1672−are ignored.
2274+`linestretch`
2275+: sets the CSS `line-height` property on the `html` element,
2276+ which is preferred to be unitless.
16732277
1674−Headers
1675−-------
2278+`backgroundcolor`
2279+: sets the CSS `background-color` property on the `html` element.
16762280
1677−There are two kinds of headers: Setext and ATX.
2281+`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
2282+: sets the corresponding CSS `padding` properties on the `body` element.
16782283
1679−### Setext-style headers ###
2284+To override or extend some [CSS] for just one document, include for example:
16802285
1681−A setext-style header is a line of text "underlined" with a row of `=` signs
1682−(for a level one header) or `-` signs (for a level two header):
2286+ ---
2287+ header-includes: |
2288+ <style>
2289+ blockquote {
2290+ font-style: italic;
2291+ }
2292+ tr.even {
2293+ background-color: #f0f0f0;
2294+ }
2295+ td, th {
2296+ padding: 0.5em 2em 0.5em 0.5em;
2297+ }
2298+ tbody {
2299+ border-bottom: none;
2300+ }
2301+ </style>
2302+ ---
16832303
1684− A level-one header
1685− ==================
2304+[CSS]: https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Learn/CSS
16862305
1687− A level-two header
1688− ------------------
2306+### Variables for HTML math
16892307
1690−The header text can contain inline formatting, such as emphasis (see
1691−[Inline formatting], below).
2308+`classoption`
2309+: when using [KaTeX](#option--katex), you can render display
2310+math equations flush left using [YAML metadata](#layout) or with
2311+`-M classoption=fleqn`.
16922312
2313+### Variables for HTML slides
16932314
1694−### ATX-style headers ###
2315+These affect HTML output when [producing slide shows with pandoc].
16952316
1696−An ATX-style header consists of one to six `#` signs and a line of
1697−text, optionally followed by any number of `#` signs. The number of
1698−`#` signs at the beginning of the line is the header level:
2317+`institute`
2318+: author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple authors
16992319
1700− ## A level-two header
2320+`revealjs-url`
2321+: base URL for reveal.js documents (defaults to
2322+ `https://unpkg.com/reveal.js@^4/`)
17012323
1702− ### A level-three header ###
2324+`s5-url`
2325+: base URL for S5 documents (defaults to `s5/default`)
17032326
1704−As with setext-style headers, the header text can contain formatting:
2327+`slidy-url`
2328+: base URL for Slidy documents (defaults to
2329+ `https://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2`)
17052330
1706− # A level-one header with a [link](/url) and *emphasis*
2331+`slideous-url`
2332+: base URL for Slideous documents (defaults to `slideous`)
17072333
1708−#### Extension: `blank_before_header` ####
2334+`title-slide-attributes`
2335+: additional attributes for the title slide of reveal.js slide shows.
2336+ See [background in reveal.js and beamer] for an example.
17092337
1710−Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a header.
1711−Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
1712−document). The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
1713−`#` to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps through line
1714−wrapping). Consider, for example:
2338+All [reveal.js configuration options] are available as variables.
2339+To turn off boolean flags that default to true in reveal.js, use `0`.
17152340
1716− I like several of their flavors of ice cream:
1717− #22, for example, and #5.
2341+[reveal.js configuration options]: https://revealjs.com/config/
17182342
1719−#### Extension: `space_in_atx_header` ####
2343+### Variables for Beamer slides
17202344
1721−Many Markdown implementations do not require a space between the
1722−opening `#`s of an ATX header and the header text, so that
1723−`#5 bolt` and `#hashtag` count as headers. With this extension,
1724−pandoc does require the space.
2345+These variables change the appearance of PDF slides using [`beamer`].
17252346
1726−### Header identifiers ###
2347+`aspectratio`
2348+: slide aspect ratio (`43` for 4:3 [default], `169` for 16:9,
2349+ `1610` for 16:10, `149` for 14:9, `141` for 1.41:1, `54` for 5:4,
2350+ `32` for 3:2)
17272351
1728−#### Extension: `header_attributes` ####
2352+`beamerarticle`
2353+: produce an article from Beamer slides
17292354
1730−Headers can be assigned attributes using this syntax at the end
1731−of the line containing the header text:
2355+`beameroption`
2356+: add extra beamer option with `\setbeameroption{}`
17322357
1733− {#identifier .class .class key=value key=value}
2358+`institute`
2359+: author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple authors
17342360
1735−Thus, for example, the following headers will all be assigned the identifier
1736−`foo`:
2361+`logo`
2362+: logo image for slides
17372363
1738− # My header {#foo}
2364+`navigation`
2365+: controls navigation symbols (default is `empty` for no navigation
2366+ symbols; other valid values are `frame`, `vertical`, and `horizontal`)
17392367
1740− ## My header ## {#foo}
2368+`section-titles`
2369+: enables "title pages" for new sections (default is true)
17412370
1742− My other header {#foo}
1743− ---------------
2371+`theme`, `colortheme`, `fonttheme`, `innertheme`, `outertheme`
2372+: beamer themes
17442373
1745−(This syntax is compatible with [PHP Markdown Extra].)
2374+`themeoptions`
2375+: options for LaTeX beamer themes (a list).
17462376
1747−Note that although this syntax allows assignment of classes and key/value
1748−attributes, writers generally don't use all of this information. Identifiers,
1749−classes, and key/value attributes are used in HTML and HTML-based formats such
1750−as EPUB and slidy. Identifiers are used for labels and link anchors in the
1751−LaTeX, ConTeXt, Textile, and AsciiDoc writers.
2377+`titlegraphic`
2378+: image for title slide
17522379
1753−Headers with the class `unnumbered` will not be numbered, even if
1754−`--number-sections` is specified. A single hyphen (`-`) in an attribute
1755−context is equivalent to `.unnumbered`, and preferable in non-English
1756−documents. So,
2380+### Variables for PowerPoint
17572381
1758− # My header {-}
2382+These variables control the visual aspects of a slide show that
2383+are not easily controlled via templates.
17592384
1760−is just the same as
2385+`monofont`
2386+: font to use for code.
17612387
1762− # My header {.unnumbered}
2388+### Variables for LaTeX
17632389
1764−#### Extension: `auto_identifiers` ####
2390+Pandoc uses these variables when [creating a PDF] with a LaTeX engine.
17652391
1766−A header without an explicitly specified identifier will be
1767−automatically assigned a unique identifier based on the header text.
1768−To derive the identifier from the header text,
2392+#### Layout
17692393
1770− - Remove all formatting, links, etc.
1771− - Remove all footnotes.
1772− - Remove all punctuation, except underscores, hyphens, and periods.
1773− - Replace all spaces and newlines with hyphens.
1774− - Convert all alphabetic characters to lowercase.
1775− - Remove everything up to the first letter (identifiers may
1776− not begin with a number or punctuation mark).
1777− - If nothing is left after this, use the identifier `section`.
2394+`block-headings`
2395+: make `\paragraph` and `\subparagraph` (fourth- and
2396+ fifth-level headings, or fifth- and sixth-level with book
2397+ classes) free-standing rather than run-in; requires further
2398+ formatting to distinguish from `\subsubsection` (third- or
2399+ fourth-level headings). Instead of using this option,
2400+ [KOMA-Script] can adjust headings more extensively:
17782401
1779−Thus, for example,
2402+ ---
2403+ documentclass: scrartcl
2404+ header-includes: |
2405+ \RedeclareSectionCommand[
2406+ beforeskip=-10pt plus -2pt minus -1pt,
2407+ afterskip=1sp plus -1sp minus 1sp,
2408+ font=\normalfont\itshape]{paragraph}
2409+ \RedeclareSectionCommand[
2410+ beforeskip=-10pt plus -2pt minus -1pt,
2411+ afterskip=1sp plus -1sp minus 1sp,
2412+ font=\normalfont\scshape,
2413+ indent=0pt]{subparagraph}
2414+ ...
17802415
1781− Header Identifier
1782− ------------------------------- ----------------------------
1783− `Header identifiers in HTML` `header-identifiers-in-html`
1784− `*Dogs*?--in *my* house?` `dogs--in-my-house`
1785− `[HTML], [S5], or [RTF]?` `html-s5-or-rtf`
1786− `3. Applications` `applications`
1787− `33` `section`
2416+`classoption`
2417+: option for document class, e.g. `oneside`; repeat for multiple options:
17882418
1789−These rules should, in most cases, allow one to determine the identifier
1790−from the header text. The exception is when several headers have the
1791−same text; in this case, the first will get an identifier as described
1792−above; the second will get the same identifier with `-1` appended; the
1793−third with `-2`; and so on.
2419+ ---
2420+ classoption:
2421+ - twocolumn
2422+ - landscape
2423+ ...
17942424
1795−These identifiers are used to provide link targets in the table of
1796−contents generated by the `--toc|--table-of-contents` option. They
1797−also make it easy to provide links from one section of a document to
1798−another. A link to this section, for example, might look like this:
2425+`documentclass`
2426+: document class: usually one of the standard classes,
2427+ [`article`], [`book`], and [`report`]; the [KOMA-Script]
2428+ equivalents, `scrartcl`, `scrbook`, and `scrreprt`, which
2429+ default to smaller margins; or [`memoir`]
17992430
1800− See the section on
1801− [header identifiers](#header-identifiers-in-html-latex-and-context).
2431+`geometry`
2432+: option for [`geometry`] package, e.g. `margin=1in`;
2433+ repeat for multiple options:
18022434
1803−Note, however, that this method of providing links to sections works
1804−only in HTML, LaTeX, and ConTeXt formats.
2435+ ---
2436+ geometry:
2437+ - top=30mm
2438+ - left=20mm
2439+ - heightrounded
2440+ ...
18052441
1806−If the `--section-divs` option is specified, then each section will
1807−be wrapped in a `div` (or a `section`, if `html5` was specified),
1808−and the identifier will be attached to the enclosing `<div>`
1809−(or `<section>`) tag rather than the header itself. This allows entire
1810−sections to be manipulated using JavaScript or treated differently in
1811−CSS.
2442+`hyperrefoptions`
2443+: option for [`hyperref`] package, e.g. `linktoc=all`;
2444+ repeat for multiple options:
18122445
1813−#### Extension: `implicit_header_references` ####
2446+ ---
2447+ hyperrefoptions:
2448+ - linktoc=all
2449+ - pdfwindowui
2450+ - pdfpagemode=FullScreen
2451+ ...
18142452
1815−Pandoc behaves as if reference links have been defined for each header.
1816−So, to link to a header
2453+`indent`
2454+: if true, pandoc will use document class settings for
2455+ indentation (the default LaTeX template otherwise removes
2456+ indentation and adds space between paragraphs)
18172457
1818− # Header identifiers in HTML
2458+`linestretch`
2459+: adjusts line spacing using the [`setspace`]
2460+ package, e.g. `1.25`, `1.5`
18192461
1820−you can simply write
2462+`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
2463+: sets margins if `geometry` is not used (otherwise `geometry`
2464+ overrides these)
18212465
1822− [Header identifiers in HTML]
2466+`pagestyle`
2467+: control `\pagestyle{}`: the default article class
2468+ supports `plain` (default), `empty` (no running heads or page numbers),
2469+ and `headings` (section titles in running heads)
18232470
1824−or
2471+`papersize`
2472+: paper size, e.g. `letter`, `a4`
18252473
1826− [Header identifiers in HTML][]
2474+`secnumdepth`
2475+: numbering depth for sections (with `--number-sections` option
2476+ or `numbersections` variable)
2477+
2478+#### Fonts
2479+
2480+`fontenc`
2481+: allows font encoding to be specified through `fontenc` package (with
2482+ `pdflatex`); default is `T1` (see [LaTeX font encodings guide])
2483+
2484+`fontfamily`
2485+: font package for use with `pdflatex`:
2486+ [TeX Live] includes many options, documented in the [LaTeX Font Catalogue].
2487+ The default is [Latin Modern][`lm`].
2488+
2489+`fontfamilyoptions`
2490+: options for package used as `fontfamily`; repeat for multiple options.
2491+ For example, to use the Libertine font with proportional lowercase
2492+ (old-style) figures through the [`libertinus`] package:
2493+
2494+ ---
2495+ fontfamily: libertinus
2496+ fontfamilyoptions:
2497+ - osf
2498+ - p
2499+ ...
2500+
2501+`fontsize`
2502+: font size for body text. The standard classes allow 10pt, 11pt, and
2503+ 12pt. To use another size, set `documentclass` to one of
2504+ the [KOMA-Script] classes, such as `scrartcl` or `scrbook`.
2505+
2506+`mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`, `CJKmainfont`
2507+: font families for use with `xelatex` or
2508+ `lualatex`: take the name of any system font, using the
2509+ [`fontspec`] package. `CJKmainfont` uses the [`xecjk`] package.
2510+
2511+`mainfontoptions`, `sansfontoptions`, `monofontoptions`, `mathfontoptions`, `CJKoptions`
2512+: options to use with `mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`,
2513+ `CJKmainfont` in `xelatex` and `lualatex`. Allow for any
2514+ choices available through [`fontspec`]; repeat for multiple
2515+ options. For example, to use the [TeX Gyre] version of
2516+ Palatino with lowercase figures:
2517+
2518+ ---
2519+ mainfont: TeX Gyre Pagella
2520+ mainfontoptions:
2521+ - Numbers=Lowercase
2522+ - Numbers=Proportional
2523+ ...
2524+
2525+`microtypeoptions`
2526+: options to pass to the microtype package
2527+
2528+#### Links
2529+
2530+`colorlinks`
2531+: add color to link text; automatically enabled if any of
2532+ `linkcolor`, `filecolor`, `citecolor`, `urlcolor`, or `toccolor` are set
2533+
2534+`linkcolor`, `filecolor`, `citecolor`, `urlcolor`, `toccolor`
2535+: color for internal links, external links, citation links, linked
2536+ URLs, and links in table of contents, respectively: uses options
2537+ allowed by [`xcolor`], including the `dvipsnames`, `svgnames`, and
2538+ `x11names` lists
2539+
2540+`links-as-notes`
2541+: causes links to be printed as footnotes
2542+
2543+#### Front matter
2544+
2545+`lof`, `lot`
2546+: include list of figures, list of tables
2547+
2548+`thanks`
2549+: contents of acknowledgments footnote after document title
2550+
2551+`toc`
2552+: include table of contents (can also be set using
2553+ `--toc/--table-of-contents`)
2554+
2555+`toc-depth`
2556+: level of section to include in table of contents
2557+
2558+#### BibLaTeX Bibliographies
2559+
2560+These variables function when using BibLaTeX for [citation rendering].
2561+
2562+`biblatexoptions`
2563+: list of options for biblatex
2564+
2565+`biblio-style`
2566+: bibliography style, when used with `--natbib` and `--biblatex`.
2567+
2568+`biblio-title`
2569+: bibliography title, when used with `--natbib` and `--biblatex`.
2570+
2571+`bibliography`
2572+: bibliography to use for resolving references
2573+
2574+`natbiboptions`
2575+: list of options for natbib
2576+
2577+[KOMA-Script]: https://ctan.org/pkg/koma-script
2578+[LaTeX Font Catalogue]: https://tug.org/FontCatalogue/
2579+[LaTeX font encodings guide]: https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide
2580+[TeX Gyre]: http://www.gust.org.pl/projects/e-foundry/tex-gyre
2581+[`article`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/article
2582+[`book`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/book
2583+[`libertinus`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/libertinus
2584+[`memoir`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/memoir
2585+[`report`]: https://ctan.org/pkg/report
2586+
2587+### Variables for ConTeXt
2588+
2589+Pandoc uses these variables when [creating a PDF] with ConTeXt.
2590+
2591+`fontsize`
2592+: font size for body text (e.g. `10pt`, `12pt`)
2593+
2594+`headertext`, `footertext`
2595+: text to be placed in running header or footer (see [ConTeXt Headers and
2596+ Footers]); repeat up to four times for different placement
2597+
2598+`indenting`
2599+: controls indentation of paragraphs, e.g. `yes,small,next` (see
2600+ [ConTeXt Indentation]); repeat for multiple options
2601+
2602+`interlinespace`
2603+: adjusts line spacing, e.g. `4ex` (using [`setupinterlinespace`]);
2604+ repeat for multiple options
2605+
2606+`layout`
2607+: options for page margins and text arrangement (see [ConTeXt Layout]);
2608+ repeat for multiple options
2609+
2610+`linkcolor`, `contrastcolor`
2611+: color for links outside and inside a page, e.g. `red`, `blue` (see
2612+ [ConTeXt Color])
2613+
2614+`linkstyle`
2615+: typeface style for links, e.g. `normal`, `bold`, `slanted`, `boldslanted`,
2616+ `type`, `cap`, `small`
2617+
2618+`lof`, `lot`
2619+: include list of figures, list of tables
2620+
2621+`mainfont`, `sansfont`, `monofont`, `mathfont`
2622+: font families: take the name of any system font (see
2623+ [ConTeXt Font Switching])
2624+
2625+`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
2626+: sets margins, if `layout` is not used (otherwise `layout`
2627+ overrides these)
2628+
2629+`pagenumbering`
2630+: page number style and location (using [`setuppagenumbering`]);
2631+ repeat for multiple options
2632+
2633+`papersize`
2634+: paper size, e.g. `letter`, `A4`, `landscape` (see [ConTeXt Paper Setup]);
2635+ repeat for multiple options
2636+
2637+`pdfa`
2638+: adds to the preamble the setup necessary to generate PDF/A
2639+ of the type specified, e.g. `1a:2005`, `2a`. If no type is
2640+ specified (i.e. the value is set to True, by e.g.
2641+ `--metadata=pdfa` or `pdfa: true` in a YAML metadata block),
2642+ `1b:2005` will be used as default, for reasons of backwards
2643+ compatibility. Using `--variable=pdfa` without specified value
2644+ is not supported. To successfully generate PDF/A the required
2645+ ICC color profiles have to be available and the content and all
2646+ included files (such as images) have to be standard conforming.
2647+ The ICC profiles and output intent may be specified using the
2648+ variables `pdfaiccprofile` and `pdfaintent`. See also [ConTeXt
2649+ PDFA] for more details.
2650+
2651+`pdfaiccprofile`
2652+: when used in conjunction with `pdfa`, specifies the ICC profile to use
2653+ in the PDF, e.g. `default.cmyk`. If left unspecified, `sRGB.icc` is
2654+ used as default. May be repeated to include multiple profiles. Note that
2655+ the profiles have to be available on the system. They can be obtained
2656+ from [ConTeXt ICC Profiles].
2657+
2658+`pdfaintent`
2659+: when used in conjunction with `pdfa`, specifies the output intent for
2660+ the colors, e.g. `ISO coated v2 300\letterpercent\space (ECI)`
2661+ If left unspecified, `sRGB IEC61966-2.1` is used as default.
2662+
2663+`toc`
2664+: include table of contents (can also be set using
2665+ `--toc/--table-of-contents`)
2666+
2667+`whitespace`
2668+: spacing between paragraphs, e.g. `none`, `small` (using
2669+ [`setupwhitespace`])
2670+
2671+`includesource`
2672+: include all source documents as file attachments in the PDF file
2673+
2674+[ConTeXt Paper Setup]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/PaperSetup
2675+[ConTeXt Layout]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Layout
2676+[ConTeXt Font Switching]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Font_Switching
2677+[ConTeXt Color]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Color
2678+[ConTeXt Headers and Footers]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Headers_and_Footers
2679+[ConTeXt Indentation]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Indentation
2680+[ConTeXt ICC Profiles]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/PDFX#ICC_profiles
2681+[ConTeXt PDFA]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/PDF/A
2682+[`setupwhitespace`]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setupwhitespace
2683+[`setupinterlinespace`]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setupinterlinespace
2684+[`setuppagenumbering`]: https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Command/setuppagenumbering
2685+
2686+### Variables for `wkhtmltopdf`
2687+
2688+Pandoc uses these variables when [creating a PDF] with [`wkhtmltopdf`].
2689+The `--css` option also affects the output.
2690+
2691+`footer-html`, `header-html`
2692+: add information to the header and footer
2693+
2694+`margin-left`, `margin-right`, `margin-top`, `margin-bottom`
2695+: set the page margins
2696+
2697+`papersize`
2698+: sets the PDF paper size
2699+
2700+### Variables for man pages
2701+
2702+`adjusting`
2703+: adjusts text to left (`l`), right (`r`), center (`c`),
2704+ or both (`b`) margins
2705+
2706+`footer`
2707+: footer in man pages
2708+
2709+`header`
2710+: header in man pages
2711+
2712+`hyphenate`
2713+: if `true` (the default), hyphenation will be used
2714+
2715+`section`
2716+: section number in man pages
2717+
2718+### Variables for ms
2719+
2720+`fontfamily`
2721+: font family (e.g. `T` or `P`)
2722+
2723+`indent`
2724+: paragraph indent (e.g. `2m`)
2725+
2726+`lineheight`
2727+: line height (e.g. `12p`)
2728+
2729+`pointsize`
2730+: point size (e.g. `10p`)
2731+
2732+### Variables set automatically
2733+
2734+Pandoc sets these variables automatically in response to [options] or
2735+document contents; users can also modify them. These vary depending
2736+on the output format, and include the following:
2737+
2738+`body`
2739+: body of document
2740+
2741+`date-meta`
2742+: the `date` variable converted to ISO 8601 YYYY-MM-DD,
2743+ included in all HTML based formats (dzslides, epub,
2744+ html, html4, html5, revealjs, s5, slideous, slidy).
2745+ The recognized formats for `date` are: `mm/dd/yyyy`,
2746+ `mm/dd/yy`, `yyyy-mm-dd` (ISO 8601), `dd MM yyyy`
2747+ (e.g. either `02 Apr 2018` or `02 April 2018`),
2748+ `MM dd, yyyy` (e.g. `Apr. 02, 2018` or `April 02, 2018),
2749+ `yyyy[mm[dd]]]` (e.g. `20180402, `201804` or `2018`).
2750+
2751+`header-includes`
2752+: contents specified by `-H/--include-in-header` (may have multiple
2753+ values)
2754+
2755+`include-before`
2756+: contents specified by `-B/--include-before-body` (may have
2757+ multiple values)
2758+
2759+`include-after`
2760+: contents specified by `-A/--include-after-body` (may have
2761+ multiple values)
2762+
2763+`meta-json`
2764+: JSON representation of all of the document's metadata. Field
2765+ values are transformed to the selected output format.
2766+
2767+`numbersections`
2768+: non-null value if `-N/--number-sections` was specified
2769+
2770+`sourcefile`, `outputfile`
2771+: source and destination filenames, as given on the command line.
2772+ `sourcefile` can also be a list if input comes from multiple files,
2773+ or empty if input is from stdin. You can use the following snippet in
2774+ your template to distinguish them:
2775+
2776+ $if(sourcefile)$
2777+ $for(sourcefile)$
2778+ $sourcefile$
2779+ $endfor$
2780+ $else$
2781+ (stdin)
2782+ $endif$
2783+
2784+ Similarly, `outputfile` can be `-` if output goes to the terminal.
2785+
2786+ If you need absolute paths, use e.g. `$curdir$/$sourcefile$`.
2787+
2788+`curdir`
2789+: working directory from which pandoc is run.
2790+
2791+`toc`
2792+: non-null value if `--toc/--table-of-contents` was specified
2793+
2794+`toc-title`
2795+: title of table of contents (works only with EPUB,
2796+ HTML, opendocument, odt, docx, pptx, beamer, LaTeX)
2797+
2798+[pandoc-templates]: https://github.com/jgm/pandoc-templates
2799+
2800+# Extensions
2801+
2802+The behavior of some of the readers and writers can be adjusted by
2803+enabling or disabling various extensions.
2804+
2805+An extension can be enabled by adding `+EXTENSION`
2806+to the format name and disabled by adding `-EXTENSION`. For example,
2807+`--from markdown_strict+footnotes` is strict Markdown with footnotes
2808+enabled, while `--from markdown-footnotes-pipe_tables` is pandoc's
2809+Markdown without footnotes or pipe tables.
2810+
2811+The markdown reader and writer make by far the most use of extensions.
2812+Extensions only used by them are therefore covered in the
2813+section [Pandoc's Markdown] below (See [Markdown variants] for
2814+`commonmark` and `gfm`.) In the following, extensions that also work
2815+for other formats are covered.
2816+
2817+Note that markdown extensions added to the `ipynb` format
2818+affect Markdown cells in Jupyter notebooks (as do command-line
2819+options like `--atx-headers`).
2820+
2821+## Typography
2822+
2823+#### Extension: `smart` ####
2824+
2825+Interpret straight quotes as curly quotes, `---` as em-dashes,
2826+`--` as en-dashes, and `...` as ellipses. Nonbreaking spaces are
2827+inserted after certain abbreviations, such as "Mr."
2828+
2829+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
2830+
2831+input formats
2832+: `markdown`, `commonmark`, `latex`, `mediawiki`, `org`, `rst`, `twiki`
2833+
2834+output formats
2835+: `markdown`, `latex`, `context`, `rst`
2836+
2837+enabled by default in
2838+: `markdown`, `latex`, `context` (both input and output)
2839+
2840+Note: If you are *writing* Markdown, then the `smart` extension
2841+has the reverse effect: what would have been curly quotes comes
2842+out straight.
2843+
2844+In LaTeX, `smart` means to use the standard TeX ligatures
2845+for quotation marks (` `` ` and ` '' ` for double quotes,
2846+`` ` `` and `` ' `` for single quotes) and dashes (`--` for
2847+en-dash and `---` for em-dash). If `smart` is disabled,
2848+then in reading LaTeX pandoc will parse these characters
2849+literally. In writing LaTeX, enabling `smart` tells pandoc
2850+to use the ligatures when possible; if `smart` is disabled
2851+pandoc will use unicode quotation mark and dash characters.
2852+
2853+## Headings and sections
2854+
2855+#### Extension: `auto_identifiers` ####
2856+
2857+A heading without an explicitly specified identifier will be
2858+automatically assigned a unique identifier based on the heading text.
2859+
2860+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
2861+
2862+input formats
2863+: `markdown`, `latex`, `rst`, `mediawiki`, `textile`
2864+
2865+output formats
2866+: `markdown`, `muse`
2867+
2868+enabled by default in
2869+: `markdown`, `muse`
2870+
2871+The default algorithm used to derive the identifier from the
2872+heading text is:
2873+
2874+ - Remove all formatting, links, etc.
2875+ - Remove all footnotes.
2876+ - Remove all non-alphanumeric characters,
2877+ except underscores, hyphens, and periods.
2878+ - Replace all spaces and newlines with hyphens.
2879+ - Convert all alphabetic characters to lowercase.
2880+ - Remove everything up to the first letter (identifiers may
2881+ not begin with a number or punctuation mark).
2882+ - If nothing is left after this, use the identifier `section`.
2883+
2884+Thus, for example,
2885+
2886+ Heading Identifier
2887+ ------------------------------- ----------------------------
2888+ `Heading identifiers in HTML` `heading-identifiers-in-html`
2889+ `Maître d'hôtel` `maître-dhôtel`
2890+ `*Dogs*?--in *my* house?` `dogs--in-my-house`
2891+ `[HTML], [S5], or [RTF]?` `html-s5-or-rtf`
2892+ `3. Applications` `applications`
2893+ `33` `section`
2894+
2895+These rules should, in most cases, allow one to determine the identifier
2896+from the heading text. The exception is when several headings have the
2897+same text; in this case, the first will get an identifier as described
2898+above; the second will get the same identifier with `-1` appended; the
2899+third with `-2`; and so on.
2900+
2901+(However, a different algorithm is used if
2902+`gfm_auto_identifiers` is enabled; see below.)
2903+
2904+These identifiers are used to provide link targets in the table of
2905+contents generated by the `--toc|--table-of-contents` option. They
2906+also make it easy to provide links from one section of a document to
2907+another. A link to this section, for example, might look like this:
2908+
2909+ See the section on
2910+ [heading identifiers](#heading-identifiers-in-html-latex-and-context).
2911+
2912+Note, however, that this method of providing links to sections works
2913+only in HTML, LaTeX, and ConTeXt formats.
2914+
2915+If the `--section-divs` option is specified, then each section will
2916+be wrapped in a `section` (or a `div`, if `html4` was specified),
2917+and the identifier will be attached to the enclosing `<section>`
2918+(or `<div>`) tag rather than the heading itself. This allows entire
2919+sections to be manipulated using JavaScript or treated differently in
2920+CSS.
2921+
2922+#### Extension: `ascii_identifiers` ####
2923+
2924+Causes the identifiers produced by `auto_identifiers` to be pure ASCII.
2925+Accents are stripped off of accented Latin letters, and non-Latin
2926+letters are omitted.
2927+
2928+#### Extension: `gfm_auto_identifiers` ####
2929+
2930+Changes the algorithm used by `auto_identifiers` to conform to
2931+GitHub's method. Spaces are converted to dashes (`-`),
2932+uppercase characters to lowercase characters, and punctuation
2933+characters other than `-` and `_` are removed.
2934+Emojis are replaced by their names.
2935+
2936+## Math Input
2937+
2938+The extensions [`tex_math_dollars`](#extension-tex_math_dollars),
2939+[`tex_math_single_backslash`](#extension-tex_math_single_backslash), and
2940+[`tex_math_double_backslash`](#extension-tex_math_double_backslash)
2941+are described in the section about Pandoc's Markdown.
2942+
2943+However, they can also be used with HTML input. This is handy for
2944+reading web pages formatted using MathJax, for example.
2945+
2946+## Raw HTML/TeX
2947+
2948+The following extensions are described in more detail in
2949+their respective sections of [Pandoc's Markdown]:
2950+
2951+- [`raw_html`](#extension-raw_html) allows HTML elements which
2952+ are not representable in pandoc's AST to be parsed as raw HTML.
2953+ By default, this is disabled for HTML input.
2954+
2955+- [`raw_tex`](#extension-raw_tex) allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt
2956+ to be included in a document. This extension can be enabled/disabled
2957+ for the following formats (in addition to `markdown`):
2958+
2959+ input formats
2960+ : `latex`, `textile`, `html` (environments, `\ref`, and
2961+ `\eqref` only), `ipynb`
2962+
2963+ output formats
2964+ : `textile`, `commonmark`
2965+
2966+ Note: as applied to `ipynb`, `raw_html` and `raw_tex` affect not
2967+ only raw TeX in markdown cells, but data with mime type
2968+ `text/html` in output cells. Since the `ipynb` reader attempts
2969+ to preserve the richest possible outputs when several options
2970+ are given, you will get best results if you disable `raw_html`
2971+ and `raw_tex` when converting to formats like `docx` which don't
2972+ allow raw `html` or `tex`.
2973+
2974+- [`native_divs`](#extension-native_divs) causes HTML `div`
2975+ elements to be parsed as native pandoc Div blocks.
2976+ If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use
2977+ `-f html-native_divs+raw_html`.
2978+
2979+- [`native_spans`](#extension-native_spans) causes HTML `span`
2980+ elements to be parsed as native pandoc Span inlines.
2981+ If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use
2982+ `-f html-native_spans+raw_html`. If you want to drop all
2983+ `div`s and `span`s when converting HTML to Markdown, you
2984+ can use `pandoc -f html-native_divs-native_spans -t markdown`.
2985+
2986+## Literate Haskell support
2987+
2988+#### Extension: `literate_haskell` ####
2989+
2990+Treat the document as literate Haskell source.
2991+
2992+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
2993+
2994+input formats
2995+: `markdown`, `rst`, `latex`
2996+
2997+output formats
2998+: `markdown`, `rst`, `latex`, `html`
2999+
3000+If you append `+lhs` (or `+literate_haskell`) to one of the formats
3001+above, pandoc will treat the document as literate Haskell source.
3002+This means that
3003+
3004+ - In Markdown input, "bird track" sections will be parsed as Haskell
3005+ code rather than block quotations. Text between `\begin{code}`
3006+ and `\end{code}` will also be treated as Haskell code. For
3007+ ATX-style headings the character '=' will be used instead of '#'.
3008+
3009+ - In Markdown output, code blocks with classes `haskell` and `literate`
3010+ will be rendered using bird tracks, and block quotations will be
3011+ indented one space, so they will not be treated as Haskell code.
3012+ In addition, headings will be rendered setext-style (with underlines)
3013+ rather than ATX-style (with '#' characters). (This is because ghc
3014+ treats '#' characters in column 1 as introducing line numbers.)
3015+
3016+ - In restructured text input, "bird track" sections will be parsed
3017+ as Haskell code.
3018+
3019+ - In restructured text output, code blocks with class `haskell` will
3020+ be rendered using bird tracks.
3021+
3022+ - In LaTeX input, text in `code` environments will be parsed as
3023+ Haskell code.
3024+
3025+ - In LaTeX output, code blocks with class `haskell` will be rendered
3026+ inside `code` environments.
3027+
3028+ - In HTML output, code blocks with class `haskell` will be rendered
3029+ with class `literatehaskell` and bird tracks.
3030+
3031+Examples:
3032+
3033+ pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html
3034+
3035+reads literate Haskell source formatted with Markdown conventions and writes
3036+ordinary HTML (without bird tracks).
3037+
3038+ pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html+lhs
3039+
3040+writes HTML with the Haskell code in bird tracks, so it can be copied
3041+and pasted as literate Haskell source.
3042+
3043+Note that GHC expects the bird tracks in the first column, so indented
3044+literate code blocks (e.g. inside an itemized environment) will not be
3045+picked up by the Haskell compiler.
3046+
3047+## Other extensions
3048+
3049+#### Extension: `empty_paragraphs` ####
3050+
3051+Allows empty paragraphs. By default empty paragraphs are
3052+omitted.
3053+
3054+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
3055+
3056+input formats
3057+: `docx`, `html`
3058+
3059+output formats
3060+: `docx`, `odt`, `opendocument`, `html`
3061+
3062+#### Extension: `native_numbering` ####
3063+
3064+Enables native numbering of figures and tables. Enumeration
3065+starts at 1.
3066+
3067+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
3068+
3069+output formats
3070+: `odt`, `opendocument`
3071+
3072+#### Extension: `xrefs_name` ####
3073+
3074+Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
3075+substituted with cross-references that will use the name or caption
3076+of the referenced item. The original link text is replaced once
3077+the generated document is refreshed. This extension can be combined
3078+with `xrefs_number` in which case numbers will appear before the
3079+name.
3080+
3081+Text in cross-references is only made consistent with the referenced
3082+item once the document has been refreshed.
3083+
3084+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
3085+
3086+output formats
3087+: `odt`, `opendocument`
3088+
3089+#### Extension: `xrefs_number` ####
3090+
3091+Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
3092+substituted with cross-references that will use the number
3093+of the referenced item. The original link text is discarded.
3094+This extension can be combined with `xrefs_name` in which case
3095+the name or caption numbers will appear after the number.
3096+
3097+For the `xrefs_number` to be useful heading numbers must be enabled
3098+in the generated document, also table and figure captions must be enabled
3099+using for example the `native_numbering` extension.
3100+
3101+Numbers in cross-references are only visible in the final document once
3102+it has been refreshed.
3103+
3104+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
3105+
3106+output formats
3107+: `odt`, `opendocument`
3108+
3109+#### Extension: `styles` #### {#ext-styles}
3110+
3111+When converting from docx, read all docx styles as divs (for
3112+paragraph styles) and spans (for character styles) regardless
3113+of whether pandoc understands the meaning of these styles.
3114+This can be used with [docx custom styles](#custom-styles).
3115+Disabled by default.
3116+
3117+input formats
3118+: `docx`
3119+
3120+#### Extension: `amuse` ####
3121+
3122+In the `muse` input format, this enables Text::Amuse
3123+extensions to Emacs Muse markup.
3124+
3125+#### Extension: `raw_markdown` ####
3126+
3127+In the `ipynb` input format, this causes Markdown cells
3128+to be included as raw Markdown blocks (allowing lossless
3129+round-tripping) rather than being parsed. Use this only
3130+when you are targeting `ipynb` or a markdown-based
3131+output format.
3132+
3133+#### Extension: `citations` {#org-citations}
3134+
3135+Some aspects of [Pandoc's Markdown citation syntax](#citations)
3136+are also accepted in `org` input.
3137+
3138+#### Extension: `element_citations` ####
3139+
3140+In the `jats` output formats, this causes reference items to
3141+be replaced with `<element-citation>` elements. These
3142+elements are not influenced by CSL styles, but all information
3143+on the item is included in tags.
3144+
3145+#### Extension: `ntb` ####
3146+
3147+In the `context` output format this enables the use of [Natural Tables
3148+(TABLE)](https://wiki.contextgarden.net/TABLE) instead of the default
3149+[Extreme Tables (xtables)](https://wiki.contextgarden.net/xtables).
3150+Natural tables allow more fine-grained global customization but come
3151+at a performance penalty compared to extreme tables.
3152+
3153+
3154+# Pandoc's Markdown
3155+
3156+Pandoc understands an extended and slightly revised version of
3157+John Gruber's [Markdown] syntax. This document explains the syntax,
3158+noting differences from standard Markdown. Except where noted, these
3159+differences can be suppressed by using the `markdown_strict` format instead
3160+of `markdown`. Extensions can be enabled or disabled to specify the
3161+behavior more granularly. They are described in the following. See also
3162+[Extensions] above, for extensions that work also on other formats.
3163+
3164+## Philosophy
3165+
3166+Markdown is designed to be easy to write, and, even more importantly,
3167+easy to read:
3168+
3169+> A Markdown-formatted document should be publishable as-is, as plain
3170+> text, without looking like it's been marked up with tags or formatting
3171+> instructions.
3172+> -- [John Gruber](https://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/syntax#philosophy)
3173+
3174+This principle has guided pandoc's decisions in finding syntax for
3175+tables, footnotes, and other extensions.
3176+
3177+There is, however, one respect in which pandoc's aims are different
3178+from the original aims of Markdown. Whereas Markdown was originally
3179+designed with HTML generation in mind, pandoc is designed for multiple
3180+output formats. Thus, while pandoc allows the embedding of raw HTML,
3181+it discourages it, and provides other, non-HTMLish ways of representing
3182+important document elements like definition lists, tables, mathematics, and
3183+footnotes.
3184+
3185+## Paragraphs
3186+
3187+A paragraph is one or more lines of text followed by one or more blank lines.
3188+Newlines are treated as spaces, so you can reflow your paragraphs as you like.
3189+If you need a hard line break, put two or more spaces at the end of a line.
3190+
3191+#### Extension: `escaped_line_breaks` ####
3192+
3193+A backslash followed by a newline is also a hard line break.
3194+Note: in multiline and grid table cells, this is the only way
3195+to create a hard line break, since trailing spaces in the cells
3196+are ignored.
3197+
3198+## Headings
3199+
3200+There are two kinds of headings: Setext and ATX.
3201+
3202+### Setext-style headings ###
3203+
3204+A setext-style heading is a line of text "underlined" with a row of `=` signs
3205+(for a level-one heading) or `-` signs (for a level-two heading):
3206+
3207+ A level-one heading
3208+ ===================
3209+
3210+ A level-two heading
3211+ -------------------
3212+
3213+The heading text can contain inline formatting, such as emphasis (see
3214+[Inline formatting], below).
3215+
3216+
3217+### ATX-style headings ###
3218+
3219+An ATX-style heading consists of one to six `#` signs and a line of
3220+text, optionally followed by any number of `#` signs. The number of
3221+`#` signs at the beginning of the line is the heading level:
3222+
3223+ ## A level-two heading
3224+
3225+ ### A level-three heading ###
3226+
3227+As with setext-style headings, the heading text can contain formatting:
3228+
3229+ # A level-one heading with a [link](/url) and *emphasis*
3230+
3231+#### Extension: `blank_before_header` ####
3232+
3233+Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a heading.
3234+Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
3235+document). The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
3236+`#` to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps through line
3237+wrapping). Consider, for example:
3238+
3239+ I like several of their flavors of ice cream:
3240+ #22, for example, and #5.
3241+
3242+#### Extension: `space_in_atx_header` ####
3243+
3244+Many Markdown implementations do not require a space between the
3245+opening `#`s of an ATX heading and the heading text, so that
3246+`#5 bolt` and `#hashtag` count as headings. With this extension,
3247+pandoc does require the space.
3248+
3249+### Heading identifiers ###
3250+
3251+See also the [`auto_identifiers`
3252+extension](#extension-auto_identifiers) above.
3253+
3254+#### Extension: `header_attributes` ####
3255+
3256+Headings can be assigned attributes using this syntax at the end
3257+of the line containing the heading text:
3258+
3259+ {#identifier .class .class key=value key=value}
3260+
3261+Thus, for example, the following headings will all be assigned the identifier
3262+`foo`:
3263+
3264+ # My heading {#foo}
3265+
3266+ ## My heading ## {#foo}
3267+
3268+ My other heading {#foo}
3269+ ---------------
3270+
3271+(This syntax is compatible with [PHP Markdown Extra].)
3272+
3273+Note that although this syntax allows assignment of classes and key/value
3274+attributes, writers generally don't use all of this information. Identifiers,
3275+classes, and key/value attributes are used in HTML and HTML-based formats such
3276+as EPUB and slidy. Identifiers are used for labels and link anchors in the
3277+LaTeX, ConTeXt, Textile, Jira markup, and AsciiDoc writers.
3278+
3279+Headings with the class `unnumbered` will not be numbered, even if
3280+`--number-sections` is specified. A single hyphen (`-`) in an attribute
3281+context is equivalent to `.unnumbered`, and preferable in non-English
3282+documents. So,
3283+
3284+ # My heading {-}
3285+
3286+is just the same as
3287+
3288+ # My heading {.unnumbered}
3289+
3290+If the `unlisted` class is present in addition to `unnumbered`,
3291+the heading will not be included in a table of contents.
3292+(Currently this feature is only implemented for certain
3293+formats: those based on LaTeX and HTML, PowerPoint, and RTF.)
3294+
3295+#### Extension: `implicit_header_references` ####
3296+
3297+Pandoc behaves as if reference links have been defined for each heading.
3298+So, to link to a heading
3299+
3300+ # Heading identifiers in HTML
3301+
3302+you can simply write
3303+
3304+ [Heading identifiers in HTML]
3305+
3306+or
3307+
3308+ [Heading identifiers in HTML][]
18273309
18283310or
18293311
1830− [the section on header identifiers][header identifiers in
3312+ [the section on heading identifiers][heading identifiers in
18313313 HTML]
18323314
18333315instead of giving the identifier explicitly:
18343316
1835− [Header identifiers in HTML](#header-identifiers-in-html)
3317+ [Heading identifiers in HTML](#heading-identifiers-in-html)
18363318
1837−If there are multiple headers with identical text, the corresponding
3319+If there are multiple headings with identical text, the corresponding
18383320reference will link to the first one only, and you will need to use explicit
18393321links to link to the others, as described above.
18403322
18413323Like regular reference links, these references are case-insensitive.
18423324
18433325Explicit link reference definitions always take priority over
1844−implicit header references. So, in the following example, the
3326+implicit heading references. So, in the following example, the
18453327link will point to `bar`, not to `#foo`:
18463328
18473329 # Foo
@@ -1850,12 +3332,11 @@ link will point to `bar`, not to `#foo`:
18503332
18513333 See [foo]
18523334
1853−Block quotations
1854−----------------
3335+## Block quotations
18553336
18563337Markdown uses email conventions for quoting blocks of text.
18573338A block quotation is one or more paragraphs or other block elements
1858−(such as lists or headers), with each line preceded by a `>` character
3339+(such as lists or headings), with each line preceded by a `>` character
18593340and an optional space. (The `>` need not start at the left margin, but
18603341it should not be indented more than three spaces.)
18613342
@@ -1890,19 +3371,19 @@ block in a block quote, you need five spaces after the `>`:
18903371
18913372#### Extension: `blank_before_blockquote` ####
18923373
1893−Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a block
1894−quote. Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
1895−document). The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
1896−`>` to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps through line
1897−wrapping). So, unless the `markdown_strict` format is used, the following does
3374+Standard Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a
3375+block quote. Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at
3376+the beginning of the document). The reason for the requirement
3377+is that it is all too easy for a `>` to end up at the beginning
3378+of a line by accident (perhaps through line wrapping). So,
3379+unless the `markdown_strict` format is used, the following does
18983380not produce a nested block quote in pandoc:
18993381
19003382 > This is a block quote.
19013383 >> Nested.
19023384
19033385
1904−Verbatim (code) blocks
1905−----------------------
3386+## Verbatim (code) blocks
19063387
19073388### Indented code blocks ###
19083389
@@ -1964,14 +3445,16 @@ this syntax:
19643445 qsort (filter (>= x) xs)
19653446 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
19663447
1967−Here `mycode` is an identifier, `haskell` and `numberLines` are classes, and
1968−`startFrom` is an attribute with value `100`. Some output formats can use this
1969−information to do syntax highlighting. Currently, the only output formats
1970−that uses this information are HTML, LaTeX, Docx, and Ms. If highlighting
1971−is supported for your output format and language, then the code block above
1972−will appear highlighted, with numbered lines. (To see which languages are
1973−supported, type `pandoc --list-highlight-languages`.) Otherwise, the code
1974−block above will appear as follows:
3448+Here `mycode` is an identifier, `haskell` and `numberLines` are
3449+classes, and `startFrom` is an attribute with value `100`. Some
3450+output formats can use this information to do syntax
3451+highlighting. Currently, the only output formats that uses this
3452+information are HTML, LaTeX, Docx, Ms, and PowerPoint. If
3453+highlighting is supported for your output format and language,
3454+then the code block above will appear highlighted, with numbered
3455+lines. (To see which languages are supported, type `pandoc
3456+--list-highlight-languages`.) Otherwise, the code block above
3457+will appear as follows:
19753458
19763459 <pre id="mycode" class="haskell numberLines" startFrom="100">
19773460 <code>
@@ -1979,6 +3462,12 @@ block above will appear as follows:
19793462 </code>
19803463 </pre>
19813464
3465+The `numberLines` (or `number-lines`) class will cause the lines
3466+of the code block to be numbered, starting with `1` or the value
3467+of the `startFrom` attribute. The `lineAnchors` (or
3468+`line-anchors`) class will cause the lines to be clickable
3469+anchors in HTML output.
3470+
19823471A shortcut form can also be used for specifying the language of
19833472the code block:
19843473
@@ -2002,8 +3491,7 @@ To set the highlighting style, use `--highlight-style`.
20023491For more information on highlighting, see [Syntax highlighting],
20033492below.
20043493
2005−Line blocks
2006−-----------
3494+## Line blocks
20073495
20083496#### Extension: `line_blocks` ####
20093497
@@ -2029,10 +3517,12 @@ line must begin with a space.
20293517 | 200 Main St.
20303518 | Berkeley, CA 94718
20313519
3520+Inline formatting (such as emphasis) is allowed in the content,
3521+but not block-level formatting (such as block quotes or lists).
3522+
20323523This syntax is borrowed from [reStructuredText].
20333524
2034−Lists
2035−-----
3525+## Lists
20363526
20373527### Bullet lists ###
20383528
@@ -2070,12 +3560,12 @@ But Markdown also allows a "lazy" format:
20703560 list item.
20713561 * and my second.
20723562
2073−### The four-space rule ###
3563+### Block content in list items ###
20743564
20753565A list item may contain multiple paragraphs and other block-level
20763566content. However, subsequent paragraphs must be preceded by a blank line
2077−and indented four spaces or a tab. The list will look better if the first
2078−paragraph is aligned with the rest:
3567+and indented to line up with the first non-space content after
3568+the list marker.
20793569
20803570 * First paragraph.
20813571
@@ -2084,21 +3574,31 @@ paragraph is aligned with the rest:
20843574 * Second paragraph. With a code block, which must be indented
20853575 eight spaces:
20863576
2087− { code }
3577+ { code }
3578+
3579+Exception: if the list marker is followed by an indented code
3580+block, which must begin 5 spaces after the list marker, then
3581+subsequent paragraphs must begin two columns after the last
3582+character of the list marker:
3583+
3584+ * code
3585+
3586+ continuation paragraph
20883587
20893588List items may include other lists. In this case the preceding blank
2090−line is optional. The nested list must be indented four spaces or
2091−one tab:
3589+line is optional. The nested list must be indented to line up with
3590+the first non-space character after the list marker of the
3591+containing list item.
20923592
20933593 * fruits
2094− + apples
2095− - macintosh
2096− - red delicious
2097− + pears
2098− + peaches
3594+ + apples
3595+ - macintosh
3596+ - red delicious
3597+ + pears
3598+ + peaches
20993599 * vegetables
2100− + broccoli
2101− + chard
3600+ + broccoli
3601+ + chard
21023602
21033603As noted above, Markdown allows you to write list items "lazily," instead of
21043604indenting continuation lines. However, if there are multiple paragraphs or
@@ -2113,21 +3613,6 @@ other blocks in a list item, the first line of each must be indented.
21133613 Second paragraph of second
21143614 list item.
21153615
2116−**Note:** Although the four-space rule for continuation paragraphs
2117−comes from the official [Markdown syntax guide], the reference implementation,
2118−`Markdown.pl`, does not follow it. So pandoc will give different results than
2119−`Markdown.pl` when authors have indented continuation paragraphs fewer than
2120−four spaces.
2121−
2122−The [Markdown syntax guide] is not explicit whether the four-space
2123−rule applies to *all* block-level content in a list item; it only
2124−mentions paragraphs and code blocks. But it implies that the rule
2125−applies to all block-level content (including nested lists), and
2126−pandoc interprets it that way.
2127−
2128− [Markdown syntax guide]:
2129− http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/syntax#list
2130−
21313616### Ordered lists ###
21323617
21333618Ordered lists work just like bulleted lists, except that the items
@@ -2207,6 +3692,12 @@ If default list markers are desired, use `#.`:
22073692 #. two
22083693 #. three
22093694
3695+#### Extension: `task_lists` ####
3696+
3697+Pandoc supports task lists, using the syntax of GitHub-Flavored Markdown.
3698+
3699+ - [ ] an unchecked task list item
3700+ - [x] checked item
22103701
22113702### Definition lists ###
22123703
@@ -2232,11 +3723,12 @@ a blank line, and must be followed by one or more definitions.
22323723A definition begins with a colon or tilde, which may be indented one
22333724or two spaces.
22343725
2235−A term may have multiple definitions, and each definition may consist of one or
2236−more block elements (paragraph, code block, list, etc.), each indented four
2237−spaces or one tab stop. The body of the definition (including the first line,
2238−aside from the colon or tilde) should be indented four spaces. However,
2239−as with other Markdown lists, you can "lazily" omit indentation except
3726+A term may have multiple definitions, and each definition may
3727+consist of one or more block elements (paragraph, code block,
3728+list, etc.), each indented four spaces or one tab stop. The
3729+body of the definition (including the first line, aside from the
3730+colon or tilde) should be indented four spaces. However, as with
3731+other Markdown lists, you can "lazily" omit indentation except
22403732at the beginning of a paragraph or other block element:
22413733
22423734 Term 1
@@ -2262,9 +3754,10 @@ definition:
22623754Note that space between items in a definition list is required.
22633755(A variant that loosens this requirement, but disallows "lazy"
22643756hard wrapping, can be activated with `compact_definition_lists`: see
2265−[Non-pandoc extensions], below.)
3757+[Non-default extensions], below.)
22663758
2267−[^3]: I have been influenced by the suggestions of [David Wheeler](http://www.justatheory.com/computers/markup/modest-markdown-proposal.html).
3759+[^3]: I have been influenced by the suggestions of [David
3760+ Wheeler](https://justatheory.com/2009/02/modest-markdown-proposal/).
22683761
22693762### Numbered example lists ###
22703763
@@ -2293,30 +3786,12 @@ document:
22933786The label can be any string of alphanumeric characters, underscores,
22943787or hyphens.
22953788
2296−
2297−### Compact and loose lists ###
2298−
2299−Pandoc behaves differently from `Markdown.pl` on some "edge
2300−cases" involving lists. Consider this source:
2301−
2302− + First
2303− + Second:
2304− - Fee
2305− - Fie
2306− - Foe
2307−
2308− + Third
2309−
2310−Pandoc transforms this into a "compact list" (with no `<p>` tags around
2311−"First", "Second", or "Third"), while Markdown puts `<p>` tags around
2312−"Second" and "Third" (but not "First"), because of the blank space
2313−around "Third". Pandoc follows a simple rule: if the text is followed by
2314−a blank line, it is treated as a paragraph. Since "Second" is followed
2315−by a list, and not a blank line, it isn't treated as a paragraph. The
2316−fact that the list is followed by a blank line is irrelevant. (Note:
2317−Pandoc works this way even when the `markdown_strict` format is specified. This
2318−behavior is consistent with the official Markdown syntax description,
2319−even though it is different from that of `Markdown.pl`.)
3789+Note: continuation paragraphs in example lists must always
3790+be indented four spaces, regardless of the length of the
3791+list marker. That is, example lists always behave as if the
3792+`four_space_rule` extension is set. This is because example
3793+labels tend to be long, and indenting content to the
3794+first non-space character after the label would be awkward.
23203795
23213796
23223797### Ending a list ###
@@ -2356,8 +3831,7 @@ of one big list:
23563831 2. dos
23573832 3. tres
23583833
2359−Horizontal rules
2360−----------------
3834+## Horizontal rules
23613835
23623836A line containing a row of three or more `*`, `-`, or `_` characters
23633837(optionally separated by spaces) produces a horizontal rule:
@@ -2367,8 +3841,7 @@ A line containing a row of three or more `*`, `-`, or `_` characters
23673841 ---------------
23683842
23693843
2370−Tables
2371−------
3844+## Tables
23723845
23733846Four kinds of tables may be used. The first three kinds presuppose the use of
23743847a fixed-width font, such as Courier. The fourth kind can be used with
@@ -2393,7 +3866,7 @@ Simple tables look like this:
23933866
23943867 Table: Demonstration of simple table syntax.
23953868
2396−The headers and table rows must each fit on one line. Column
3869+The header and table rows must each fit on one line. Column
23973870alignments are determined by the position of the header text relative
23983871to the dashed line below it:[^4]
23993872
@@ -2412,7 +3885,7 @@ to the dashed line below it:[^4]
24123885The table must end with a blank line, or a line of dashes followed by
24133886a blank line.
24143887
2415−The column headers may be omitted, provided a dashed line is used
3888+The column header row may be omitted, provided a dashed line is used
24163889to end the table. For example:
24173890
24183891 ------- ------ ---------- -------
@@ -2421,13 +3894,13 @@ to end the table. For example:
24213894 1 1 1 1
24223895 ------- ------ ---------- -------
24233896
2424−When headers are omitted, column alignments are determined on the basis
3897+When the header row is omitted, column alignments are determined on the basis
24253898of the first line of the table body. So, in the tables above, the columns
24263899would be right, left, center, and right aligned, respectively.
24273900
24283901#### Extension: `multiline_tables` ####
24293902
2430−Multiline tables allow headers and table rows to span multiple lines
3903+Multiline tables allow header and table rows to span multiple lines
24313904of text (but cells that span multiple columns or rows of the table are
24323905not supported). Here is an example:
24333906
@@ -2449,7 +3922,7 @@ not supported). Here is an example:
24493922These work like simple tables, but with the following differences:
24503923
24513924 - They must begin with a row of dashes, before the header text
2452− (unless the headers are omitted).
3925+ (unless the header row is omitted).
24533926 - They must end with a row of dashes, then a blank line.
24543927 - The rows must be separated by blank lines.
24553928
@@ -2458,7 +3931,7 @@ the columns, and the writers try to reproduce these relative widths in
24583931the output. So, if you find that one of the columns is too narrow in the
24593932output, try widening it in the Markdown source.
24603933
2461−Headers may be omitted in multiline tables as well as simple tables:
3934+The header may be omitted in multiline tables as well as simple tables:
24623935
24633936 ----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
24643937 First row 12.0 Example of a row that
@@ -2469,7 +3942,7 @@ Headers may be omitted in multiline tables as well as simple tables:
24693942 rows.
24703943 ----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
24713944
2472− : Here's a multiline table without headers.
3945+ : Here's a multiline table without a header.
24733946
24743947It is possible for a multiline table to have just one row, but the row
24753948should be followed by a blank line (and then the row of dashes that ends
@@ -2495,9 +3968,8 @@ The row of `=`s separates the header from the table body, and can be
24953968omitted for a headerless table. The cells of grid tables may contain
24963969arbitrary block elements (multiple paragraphs, code blocks, lists,
24973970etc.). Cells that span multiple columns or rows are not
2498−supported. Grid tables can be created easily using [Emacs table mode].
2499−
2500−[Emacs table mode]: http://table.sourceforge.net/
3971+supported. Grid tables can be created easily using Emacs' table-mode
3972+(`M-x table-insert`).
25013973
25023974Alignments can be specified as with pipe tables, by putting
25033975colons at the boundaries of the separator line after the
@@ -2515,6 +3987,18 @@ For headerless tables, the colons go on the top line instead:
25153987 | Right | Left | Centered |
25163988 +---------------+---------------+--------------------+
25173989
3990+##### Grid Table Limitations #####
3991+
3992+Pandoc does not support grid tables with row spans or column spans.
3993+This means that neither variable numbers of columns across rows nor
3994+variable numbers of rows across columns are supported by Pandoc.
3995+All grid tables must have the same number of columns in each row,
3996+and the same number of rows in each column. For example, the
3997+Docutils [sample grid tables] will not render as expected with
3998+Pandoc.
3999+
4000+[sample grid tables]: https://docutils.sourceforge.io/docs/ref/rst/restructuredtext.html#grid-tables
4001+
25184002
25194003#### Extension: `pipe_tables` ####
25204004
@@ -2546,10 +4030,15 @@ legal (though ugly) pipe table:
25464030
25474031The cells of pipe tables cannot contain block elements like paragraphs
25484032and lists, and cannot span multiple lines. If a pipe table contains a
2549−row whose printable content is wider than the column width (see
2550−`--columns`), then the cell contents will wrap, with the
2551−relative cell widths determined by the widths of the separator
2552−lines.
4033+row whose Markdown content is wider than the column width (see
4034+`--columns`), then the table will take up the full text width and
4035+the cell contents will wrap, with the relative cell widths determined
4036+by the number of dashes in the line separating the table header from
4037+the table body. (For example `---|-` would make the first column 3/4
4038+and the second column 1/4 of the full text width.)
4039+On the other hand, if no lines are wider than column width, then
4040+cell contents will not be wrapped, and the cells will be sized
4041+to their contents.
25534042
25544043Note: pandoc also recognizes pipe tables of the following
25554044form, as can be produced by Emacs' orgtbl-mode:
@@ -2565,8 +4054,7 @@ you'll need to add colons as above.
25654054
25664055[PHP Markdown Extra tables]: https://michelf.ca/projects/php-markdown/extra/#table
25674056
2568−Metadata blocks
2569−---------------
4057+## Metadata blocks
25704058
25714059#### Extension: `pandoc_title_block` ####
25724060
@@ -2582,30 +4070,42 @@ output.) The block may contain just a title, a title and an author,
25824070or all three elements. If you want to include an author but no
25834071title, or a title and a date but no author, you need a blank line:
25844072
2585− %
2586− % Author
4073+```
4074+%
4075+% Author
4076+```
25874077
2588− % My title
2589− %
2590− % June 15, 2006
4078+```
4079+% My title
4080+%
4081+% June 15, 2006
4082+```
25914083
25924084The title may occupy multiple lines, but continuation lines must
25934085begin with leading space, thus:
25944086
2595− % My title
2596− on multiple lines
4087+```
4088+% My title
4089+ on multiple lines
4090+```
25974091
25984092If a document has multiple authors, the authors may be put on
25994093separate lines with leading space, or separated by semicolons, or
26004094both. So, all of the following are equivalent:
26014095
2602− % Author One
2603− Author Two
4096+```
4097+% Author One
4098+ Author Two
4099+```
26044100
2605− % Author One; Author Two
4101+```
4102+% Author One; Author Two
4103+```
26064104
2607− % Author One;
2608− Author Two
4105+```
4106+% Author One;
4107+ Author Two
4108+```
26094109
26104110The date must fit on one line.
26114111
@@ -2646,7 +4146,7 @@ will also have "Version 4.0" in the header.
26464146
26474147#### Extension: `yaml_metadata_block` ####
26484148
2649−A YAML metadata block is a valid YAML object, delimited by a line of three
4149+A [YAML] metadata block is a valid YAML object, delimited by a line of three
26504150hyphens (`---`) at the top and a line of three hyphens (`---`) or three dots
26514151(`...`) at the bottom. A YAML metadata block may occur anywhere in the
26524152document, but if it is not at the beginning, it must be preceded by a blank
@@ -2657,41 +4157,53 @@ and pass it to pandoc as an argument, along with your Markdown files:
26574157 pandoc chap1.md chap2.md chap3.md metadata.yaml -s -o book.html
26584158
26594159Just be sure that the YAML file begins with `---` and ends with `---` or
2660−`...`.)
4160+`...`.) Alternatively, you can use the `--metadata-file` option. Using
4161+that approach however, you cannot reference content (like footnotes)
4162+from the main markdown input document.
26614163
26624164Metadata will be taken from the fields of the YAML object and added to any
26634165existing document metadata. Metadata can contain lists and objects (nested
26644166arbitrarily), but all string scalars will be interpreted as Markdown. Fields
26654167with names ending in an underscore will be ignored by pandoc. (They may be
2666−given a role by external processors.)
4168+given a role by external processors.) Field names must not be
4169+interpretable as YAML numbers or boolean values (so, for
4170+example, `yes`, `True`, and `15` cannot be used as field names).
26674171
2668−A document may contain multiple metadata blocks. The metadata fields will
2669−be combined through a *left-biased union*: if two metadata blocks attempt
2670−to set the same field, the value from the first block will be taken.
4172+A document may contain multiple metadata blocks. If two
4173+metadata blocks attempt to set the same field, the value from
4174+the second block will be taken.
26714175
26724176When pandoc is used with `-t markdown` to create a Markdown document,
26734177a YAML metadata block will be produced only if the `-s/--standalone`
26744178option is used. All of the metadata will appear in a single block
26754179at the beginning of the document.
26764180
2677−Note that YAML escaping rules must be followed. Thus, for example,
2678−if a title contains a colon, it must be quoted. The pipe character
2679−(`|`) can be used to begin an indented block that will be interpreted
2680−literally, without need for escaping. This form is necessary
2681−when the field contains blank lines or block-level formatting:
4181+Note that [YAML] escaping rules must be followed. Thus, for example,
4182+if a title contains a colon, it must be quoted, and if it contains a
4183+backslash escape, then it must be ensured that it is not treated as a
4184+[YAML escape sequence]. The pipe character (`|`) can be used to begin
4185+an indented block that will be interpreted literally, without need for
4186+escaping. This form is necessary when the field contains blank lines
4187+or block-level formatting:
26824188
26834189 ---
26844190 title: 'This is the title: it contains a colon'
26854191 author:
26864192 - Author One
26874193 - Author Two
2688− tags: [nothing, nothingness]
4194+ keywords: [nothing, nothingness]
26894195 abstract: |
26904196 This is the abstract.
26914197
26924198 It consists of two paragraphs.
26934199 ...
26944200
4201+The literal block after the `|` must be indented relative to the
4202+line containing the `|`. If it is not, the YAML will be invalid
4203+and pandoc will not interpret it as metadata. For an overview
4204+of the complex rules governing YAML, see the [Wikipedia entry on
4205+YAML syntax].
4206+
26954207Template variables will be set automatically from the metadata. Thus, for
26964208example, in writing HTML, the variable `abstract` will be set to the HTML
26974209equivalent of the Markdown in the `abstract` field:
@@ -2725,9 +4237,38 @@ template:
27254237 $endif$
27264238 $endfor$
27274239
4240+Raw content to include in the document's header may be specified
4241+using `header-includes`; however, it is important to mark up
4242+this content as raw code for a particular output format, using
4243+the [`raw_attribute` extension](#extension-raw_attribute)), or it
4244+will be interpreted as markdown. For example:
4245+
4246+ header-includes:
4247+ - |
4248+ ```{=latex}
4249+ \let\oldsection\section
4250+ \renewcommand{\section}[1]{\clearpage\oldsection{#1}}
4251+ ```
4252+
4253+Note: the `yaml_metadata_block` extension works with
4254+`commonmark` as well as `markdown` (and it is enabled by default
4255+in `gfm` and `commonmark_x`). However, in these formats the
4256+following restrictions apply:
4257+
4258+- The YAML metadata block must occur at the beginning of the
4259+ document (and there can be only one). If multiple files are
4260+ given as arguments to pandoc, only the first can be a YAML
4261+ metadata block.
27284262
2729−Backslash escapes
2730−-----------------
4263+- The leaf nodes of the YAML structure are parsed in isolation from
4264+ each other and from the rest of the document. So, for
4265+ example, you can't use a reference link in these contexts
4266+ if the link definition is somewhere else in the document.
4267+
4268+[YAML escape sequence]: https://yaml.org/spec/1.2/spec.html#id2776092
4269+[Wikipedia entry on YAML syntax]: https://en.m.wikipedia.org/wiki/YAML#Syntax
4270+
4271+## Backslash escapes
27314272
27324273#### Extension: `all_symbols_escapable` ####
27334274
@@ -2753,9 +4294,12 @@ which allows only the following characters to be backslash-escaped:
27534294(However, if the `markdown_strict` format is used, the standard Markdown rule
27544295will be used.)
27554296
2756−A backslash-escaped space is parsed as a nonbreaking space. It will
2757−appear in TeX output as `~` and in HTML and XML as `\ ` or
2758−`\ `.
4297+A backslash-escaped space is parsed as a nonbreaking space. In TeX output,
4298+it will appear as `~`. In HTML and XML output, it will appear as a
4299+literal unicode nonbreaking space character (note that it will thus
4300+actually look "invisible" in the generated HTML source; you can still
4301+use the `--ascii` command-line option to make it appear as an explicit
4302+entity).
27594303
27604304A backslash-escaped newline (i.e. a backslash occurring at the end of
27614305a line) is parsed as a hard line break. It will appear in TeX output as
@@ -2765,8 +4309,7 @@ two trailing spaces on a line.
27654309
27664310Backslash escapes do not work in verbatim contexts.
27674311
2768−Inline formatting
2769−-----------------
4312+## Inline formatting
27704313
27714314### Emphasis ###
27724315
@@ -2814,12 +4357,13 @@ text by `~` characters. Thus, for example,
28144357
28154358 H~2~O is a liquid. 2^10^ is 1024.
28164359
2817−If the superscripted or subscripted text contains spaces, these spaces
2818−must be escaped with backslashes. (This is to prevent accidental
2819−superscripting and subscripting through the ordinary use of `~` and `^`.)
2820−Thus, if you want the letter P with 'a cat' in subscripts, use
2821−`P~a\ cat~`, not `P~a cat~`.
2822−
4360+The text between `^...^` or `~...~` may not contain spaces or
4361+newlines. If the superscripted or subscripted text contains
4362+spaces, these spaces must be escaped with backslashes. (This is
4363+to prevent accidental superscripting and subscripting through
4364+the ordinary use of `~` and `^`, and also bad interactions with
4365+footnotes.) Thus, if you want the letter P with 'a cat' in
4366+subscripts, use `P~a\ cat~`, not `P~a cat~`.
28234367
28244368### Verbatim ###
28254369
@@ -2853,19 +4397,22 @@ Attributes can be attached to verbatim text, just as with
28534397
28544398### Small caps ###
28554399
2856−To write small caps, you can use an HTML span tag:
4400+To write small caps, use the `smallcaps` class:
28574401
2858− <span style="font-variant:small-caps;">Small caps</span>
4402+ [Small caps]{.smallcaps}
28594403
2860−(The semicolon is optional and there may be space after the
2861−colon.) This will work in all output formats that support small caps.
4404+Or, without the `bracketed_spans` extension:
4405+
4406+ <span class="smallcaps">Small caps</span>
4407+
4408+For compatibility with other Markdown flavors, CSS is also supported:
4409+
4410+ <span style="font-variant:small-caps;">Small caps</span>
28624411
2863−Alternatively, you can also use the new `bracketed_spans` syntax:
4412+This will work in all output formats that support small caps.
28644413
2865− [Small caps]{style="font-variant:small-caps;"}
28664414
2867−Math
2868−----
4415+## Math
28694416
28704417#### Extension: `tex_math_dollars` ####
28714418
@@ -2877,22 +4424,38 @@ left, and must not be followed immediately by a digit. Thus,
28774424you need to enclose text in literal `$` characters, backslash-escape
28784425them and they won't be treated as math delimiters.
28794426
4427+For display math, use `$$` delimiters. (In this case, the delimiters
4428+may be separated from the formula by whitespace. However, there can be
4429+no blank lines betwen the opening and closing `$$` delimiters.)
4430+
28804431TeX math will be printed in all output formats. How it is rendered
28814432depends on the output format:
28824433
2883−Markdown, LaTeX, Emacs Org mode, ConTeXt, ZimWiki
2884− ~ It will appear verbatim between `$` characters.
4434+LaTeX
4435+ ~ It will appear verbatim surrounded by `\(...\)` (for inline
4436+ math) or `\[...\]` (for display math).
4437+
4438+Markdown, Emacs Org mode, ConTeXt, ZimWiki
4439+ ~ It will appear verbatim surrounded by `$...$` (for inline
4440+ math) or `$$...$$` (for display math).
4441+
4442+XWiki
4443+ ~ It will appear verbatim surrounded by `{{formula}}..{{/formula}}`.
28854444
28864445reStructuredText
28874446 ~ It will be rendered using an [interpreted text role `:math:`].
28884447
28894448AsciiDoc
2890− ~ It will be rendered as `latexmath:[...]`.
4449+ ~ For AsciiDoc output format (`-t asciidoc`) it will appear verbatim
4450+ surrounded by `latexmath:[$...$]` (for inline math) or
4451+ `[latexmath]++++\[...\]+++` (for display math).
4452+ For AsciiDoctor output format (`-t asciidoctor`) the LaTex delimiters
4453+ (`$..$` and `\[..\]`) are omitted.
28914454
28924455Texinfo
28934456 ~ It will be rendered inside a `@math` command.
28944457
2895−groff man
4458+roff man, Jira markup
28964459 ~ It will be rendered verbatim without `$`'s.
28974460
28984461MediaWiki, DokuWiki
@@ -2901,10 +4464,13 @@ MediaWiki, DokuWiki
29014464Textile
29024465 ~ It will be rendered inside `<span class="math">` tags.
29034466
2904−RTF, OpenDocument, ODT
4467+RTF, OpenDocument
29054468 ~ It will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters,
29064469 and will otherwise appear verbatim.
29074470
4471+ODT
4472+ ~ It will be rendered, if possible, using MathML.
4473+
29084474DocBook
29094475 ~ If the `--mathml` flag is used, it will be rendered using MathML
29104476 in an `inlineequation` or `informalequation` tag. Otherwise it
@@ -2920,58 +4486,12 @@ FictionBook2
29204486
29214487HTML, Slidy, DZSlides, S5, EPUB
29224488 ~ The way math is rendered in HTML will depend on the
2923− command-line options selected:
2924−
2925− 1. The default is to render TeX math as far as possible using Unicode
2926− characters, as with RTF, DocBook, and OpenDocument output. Formulas
2927− are put inside a `span` with `class="math"`, so that they may be
2928− styled differently from the surrounding text if needed.
2929−
2930− 2. If the `--latexmathml` option is used, TeX math will be displayed
2931− between `$` or `$$` characters and put in `<span>` tags with class `LaTeX`.
2932− The [LaTeXMathML] script will be used to render it as formulas.
2933− (This trick does not work in all browsers, but it works in Firefox.
2934− In browsers that do not support LaTeXMathML, TeX math will appear
2935− verbatim between `$` characters.)
2936−
2937− 3. If the `--jsmath` option is used, TeX math will be put inside
2938− `<span>` tags (for inline math) or `<div>` tags (for display math)
2939− with class `math`. The [jsMath] script will be used to render
2940− it.
2941−
2942− 4. If the `--mimetex` option is used, the [mimeTeX] CGI script will
2943− be called to generate images for each TeX formula. This should
2944− work in all browsers. The `--mimetex` option takes an optional URL
2945− as argument. If no URL is specified, it will be assumed that the
2946− mimeTeX CGI script is at `/cgi-bin/mimetex.cgi`.
2947−
2948− 5. If the `--gladtex` option is used, TeX formulas will be enclosed
2949− in `<eq>` tags in the HTML output. The resulting `htex` file may then
2950− be processed by [gladTeX], which will produce image files for each
2951− formula and an HTML file with links to these images. So, the
2952− procedure is:
2953−
2954− pandoc -s --gladtex myfile.txt -o myfile.htex
2955− gladtex -d myfile-images myfile.htex
2956− # produces myfile.html and images in myfile-images
2957−
2958− 6. If the `--webtex` option is used, TeX formulas will be converted
2959− to `<img>` tags that link to an external script that converts
2960− formulas to images. The formula will be URL-encoded and concatenated
2961− with the URL provided. For SVG images you can for example use
2962− `--webtex https://latex.codecogs.com/svg.latex?`.
2963− If no URL is specified, the CodeCogs URL generating PNGs
2964− will be used (`https://latex.codecogs.com/png.latex?`).
2965−
2966− 7. If the `--mathjax` option is used, TeX math will be displayed
2967− between `\(...\)` (for inline math) or `\[...\]` (for display
2968− math) and put in `<span>` tags with class `math`.
2969− The [MathJax] script will be used to render it as formulas.
2970−
2971−[interpreted text role `:math:`]: http://docutils.sourceforge.net/docs/ref/rst/roles.html#math
2972−
2973−Raw HTML
2974−--------
4489+ command-line options selected. Therefore see [Math rendering in HTML]
4490+ above.
4491+
4492+[interpreted text role `:math:`]: https://docutils.sourceforge.io/docs/ref/rst/roles.html#math
4493+
4494+## Raw HTML
29754495
29764496#### Extension: `raw_html` ####
29774497
@@ -2982,8 +4502,17 @@ Markdown allows it, but it has been made an extension so that it can
29824502be disabled if desired.)
29834503
29844504The raw HTML is passed through unchanged in HTML, S5, Slidy, Slideous,
2985−DZSlides, EPUB, Markdown, Emacs Org mode, and Textile output, and suppressed
2986−in other formats.
4505+DZSlides, EPUB, Markdown, CommonMark, Emacs Org mode, and Textile
4506+output, and suppressed in other formats.
4507+
4508+For a more explicit way of including raw HTML in a Markdown
4509+document, see the [`raw_attribute` extension][Extension: `raw_attribute`].
4510+
4511+In the CommonMark format, if `raw_html` is enabled, superscripts,
4512+subscripts, strikeouts and small capitals will be represented as HTML.
4513+Otherwise, plain-text fallbacks will be used. Note that even if
4514+`raw_html` is disabled, tables will be rendered with HTML syntax if
4515+they cannot use pipe syntax.
29874516
29884517#### Extension: `markdown_in_html_blocks` ####
29894518
@@ -3000,7 +4529,7 @@ Thus, for example, pandoc will turn
30004529 <table>
30014530 <tr>
30024531 <td>*one*</td>
3003− <td>[a link](http://google.com)</td>
4532+ <td>[a link](https://google.com)</td>
30044533 </tr>
30054534 </table>
30064535
@@ -3009,14 +4538,14 @@ into
30094538 <table>
30104539 <tr>
30114540 <td><em>one</em></td>
3012− <td><a href="http://google.com">a link</a></td>
4541+ <td><a href="https://google.com">a link</a></td>
30134542 </tr>
30144543 </table>
30154544
30164545whereas `Markdown.pl` will preserve it as is.
30174546
3018−There is one exception to this rule: text between `<script>` and
3019−`<style>` tags is not interpreted as Markdown.
4547+There is one exception to this rule: text between `<script>`,
4548+`<style>`, and `<textarea>` tags is not interpreted as Markdown.
30204549
30214550This departure from standard Markdown should make it easier to mix
30224551Markdown with HTML block elements. For example, one can surround
@@ -3058,6 +4587,10 @@ Note that in LaTeX environments, like
30584587the material between the begin and end tags will be interpreted as raw
30594588LaTeX, not as Markdown.
30604589
4590+For a more explicit and flexible way of including raw TeX in a
4591+Markdown document, see the [`raw_attribute`
4592+extension][Extension: `raw_attribute`].
4593+
30614594Inline LaTeX is ignored in output formats other than Markdown, LaTeX,
30624595Emacs Org mode, and ConTeXt.
30634596
@@ -3068,7 +4601,7 @@ Emacs Org mode, and ConTeXt.
30684601Inline spans and fenced code blocks with a special
30694602kind of attribute will be parsed as raw content with the
30704603designated format. For example, the following produces a raw
3071−groff `ms` block:
4604+roff `ms` block:
30724605
30734606 ```{=ms}
30744607 .MYMACRO
@@ -3078,9 +4611,24 @@ And the following produces a raw `html` inline element:
30784611
30794612 This is `<a>html</a>`{=html}
30804613
4614+This can be useful to insert raw xml into `docx` documents, e.g.
4615+a pagebreak:
4616+
4617+ ```{=openxml}
4618+ <w:p>
4619+ <w:r>
4620+ <w:br w:type="page"/>
4621+ </w:r>
4622+ </w:p>
4623+ ```
4624+
30814625The format name should match the target format name (see
30824626`-t/--to`, above, for a list, or use `pandoc
3083−--list-output-formats`).
4627+--list-output-formats`). Use `openxml` for `docx` output,
4628+`opendocument` for `odt` output, `html5` for `epub3` output,
4629+`html4` for `epub2` output, and `latex`, `beamer`,
4630+`ms`, or `html5` for `pdf` output (depending on what you
4631+use for `--pdf-engine`).
30844632
30854633This extension presupposes that the relevant kind of
30864634inline code or fenced code block is enabled. Thus, for
@@ -3089,26 +4637,34 @@ example, to use a raw attribute with a backtick code block,
30894637
30904638The raw attribute cannot be combined with regular attributes.
30914639
3092−LaTeX macros
3093−------------
4640+## LaTeX macros
30944641
30954642#### Extension: `latex_macros` ####
30964643
3097−For output formats other than LaTeX, pandoc will parse LaTeX `\newcommand` and
3098−`\renewcommand` definitions and apply the resulting macros to all LaTeX
3099−math. So, for example, the following will work in all output formats,
3100−not just LaTeX:
4644+When this extension is enabled, pandoc will parse LaTeX
4645+macro definitions and apply the resulting macros to all LaTeX
4646+math and raw LaTeX. So, for example, the following will work in
4647+all output formats, not just LaTeX:
31014648
31024649 \newcommand{\tuple}[1]{\langle #1 \rangle}
31034650
31044651 $\tuple{a, b, c}$
31054652
3106−In LaTeX output, the `\newcommand` definition will simply be passed
3107−unchanged to the output.
4653+Note that LaTeX macros will not be applied if they occur
4654+inside a raw span or block marked with the
4655+[`raw_attribute` extension](#extension-raw_attribute).
31084656
4657+When `latex_macros` is disabled, the raw LaTeX and math will
4658+not have macros applied. This is usually a better approach when
4659+you are targeting LaTeX or PDF.
31094660
3110−Links
3111−-----
4661+Macro definitions in LaTeX will be passed through as raw LaTeX
4662+only if `latex_macros` is not enabled. Macro definitions in
4663+Markdown source (or other formats allowing `raw_tex`) will
4664+be passed through regardless of whether `latex_macros` is
4665+enabled.
4666+
4667+## Links
31124668
31134669Markdown allows links to be specified in several ways.
31144670
@@ -3117,7 +4673,7 @@ Markdown allows links to be specified in several ways.
31174673If you enclose a URL or email address in pointy brackets, it
31184674will become a link:
31194675
3120− <http://google.com>
4676+ <https://google.com>
31214677 <sam@green.eggs.ham>
31224678
31234679### Inline links ###
@@ -3127,7 +4683,7 @@ followed by the URL in parentheses. (Optionally, the URL can
31274683be followed by a link title, in quotes.)
31284684
31294685 This is an [inline link](/url), and here's [one with
3130− a title](http://fsf.org "click here for a good time!").
4686+ a title](https://fsf.org "click here for a good time!").
31314687
31324688There can be no space between the bracketed part and the parenthesized part.
31334689The link text can contain formatting (such as emphasis), but the title cannot.
@@ -3156,7 +4712,7 @@ Here are some examples:
31564712
31574713 [my label 1]: /foo/bar.html "My title, optional"
31584714 [my label 2]: /foo
3159− [my label 3]: http://fsf.org (The free software foundation)
4715+ [my label 3]: https://fsf.org (The free software foundation)
31604716 [my label 4]: /bar#special 'A title in single quotes'
31614717
31624718The URL may optionally be surrounded by angle brackets:
@@ -3165,7 +4721,7 @@ The URL may optionally be surrounded by angle brackets:
31654721
31664722The title may go on the next line:
31674723
3168− [my label 3]: http://fsf.org
4724+ [my label 3]: https://fsf.org
31694725 "The free software foundation"
31704726
31714727Note that link labels are not case sensitive. So, this will work:
@@ -3187,235 +4743,614 @@ such as list items or block quotes. Pandoc lifts this arbitrary
31874743seeming restriction. So the following is fine in pandoc, though
31884744not in most other implementations:
31894745
3190− > My block [quote].
3191− >
3192− > [quote]: /foo
4746+ > My block [quote].
4747+ >
4748+ > [quote]: /foo
4749+
4750+#### Extension: `shortcut_reference_links` ####
4751+
4752+In a *shortcut* reference link, the second pair of brackets may
4753+be omitted entirely:
4754+
4755+ See [my website].
4756+
4757+ [my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
4758+
4759+### Internal links ###
4760+
4761+To link to another section of the same document, use the automatically
4762+generated identifier (see [Heading identifiers]). For example:
4763+
4764+ See the [Introduction](#introduction).
4765+
4766+or
4767+
4768+ See the [Introduction].
4769+
4770+ [Introduction]: #introduction
4771+
4772+Internal links are currently supported for HTML formats (including
4773+HTML slide shows and EPUB), LaTeX, and ConTeXt.
4774+
4775+## Images
4776+
4777+A link immediately preceded by a `!` will be treated as an image.
4778+The link text will be used as the image's alt text:
4779+
4780+ 
4781+
4782+ ![movie reel]
4783+
4784+ [movie reel]: movie.gif
4785+
4786+#### Extension: `implicit_figures` ####
4787+
4788+An image with nonempty alt text, occurring by itself in a
4789+paragraph, will be rendered as a figure with a caption. The
4790+image's alt text will be used as the caption.
4791+
4792+ 
4793+
4794+How this is rendered depends on the output format. Some output
4795+formats (e.g. RTF) do not yet support figures. In those
4796+formats, you'll just get an image in a paragraph by itself, with
4797+no caption.
4798+
4799+If you just want a regular inline image, just make sure it is not
4800+the only thing in the paragraph. One way to do this is to insert a
4801+nonbreaking space after the image:
4802+
4803+ \
4804+
4805+Note that in reveal.js slide shows, an image in a paragraph
4806+by itself that has the `stretch` class will fill the screen,
4807+and the caption and figure tags will be omitted.
4808+
4809+#### Extension: `link_attributes` ####
4810+
4811+Attributes can be set on links and images:
4812+
4813+ An inline {#id .class width=30 height=20px}
4814+ and a reference ![image][ref] with attributes.
4815+
4816+ [ref]: foo.jpg "optional title" {#id .class key=val key2="val 2"}
4817+
4818+(This syntax is compatible with [PHP Markdown Extra] when only `#id`
4819+and `.class` are used.)
4820+
4821+For HTML and EPUB, all known HTML5 attributes except `width` and
4822+`height` (but including `srcset` and `sizes`) are passed through
4823+as is. Unknown attributes are passed through as custom
4824+attributes, with `data-` prepended. The other writers ignore
4825+attributes that are not specifically supported by their output format.
4826+
4827+The `width` and `height` attributes on images are treated specially. When
4828+used without a unit, the unit is assumed to be pixels. However, any of
4829+the following unit identifiers can be used: `px`, `cm`, `mm`, `in`, `inch`
4830+and `%`. There must not be any spaces between the number and the unit.
4831+For example:
4832+
4833+```
4834+{ width=50% }
4835+```
4836+
4837+- Dimensions may be converted to a form that is compatible with
4838+ the output format (for example, dimensions given in pixels will
4839+ be converted to inches when converting HTML to LaTeX). Conversion
4840+ between pixels and physical measurements is affected by the
4841+ `--dpi` option (by default, 96 dpi is assumed, unless the image
4842+ itself contains dpi information).
4843+- The `%` unit is generally relative to some available space.
4844+ For example the above example will render to the following.
4845+ - HTML: `<img href="file.jpg" style="width: 50%;" />`
4846+ - LaTeX: `\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth,height=\textheight]{file.jpg}`
4847+ (If you're using a custom template, you need to configure `graphicx`
4848+ as in the default template.)
4849+ - ConTeXt: `\externalfigure[file.jpg][width=0.5\textwidth]`
4850+- Some output formats have a notion of a class
4851+ ([ConTeXt](https://wiki.contextgarden.net/Using_Graphics#Multiple_Image_Settings))
4852+ or a unique identifier (LaTeX `\caption`), or both (HTML).
4853+- When no `width` or `height` attributes are specified, the fallback
4854+ is to look at the image resolution and the dpi metadata embedded in
4855+ the image file.
4856+
4857+## Divs and Spans
4858+
4859+Using the `native_divs` and `native_spans` extensions
4860+(see [above][Extension: `native_divs`]), HTML syntax can
4861+be used as part of markdown to create native `Div` and `Span`
4862+elements in the pandoc AST (as opposed to raw HTML).
4863+However, there is also nicer syntax available:
4864+
4865+#### Extension: `fenced_divs` ####
4866+
4867+Allow special fenced syntax for native `Div` blocks. A Div
4868+starts with a fence containing at least three consecutive
4869+colons plus some attributes. The attributes may optionally
4870+be followed by another string of consecutive colons.
4871+The attribute syntax is exactly as in fenced code blocks (see
4872+[Extension: `fenced_code_attributes`]). As with fenced
4873+code blocks, one can use either attributes in curly braces
4874+or a single unbraced word, which will be treated as a class
4875+name. The Div ends with another line containing a string of at
4876+least three consecutive colons. The fenced Div should be
4877+separated by blank lines from preceding and following blocks.
4878+
4879+Example:
4880+
4881+ ::::: {#special .sidebar}
4882+ Here is a paragraph.
4883+
4884+ And another.
4885+ :::::
4886+
4887+Fenced divs can be nested. Opening fences are distinguished
4888+because they *must* have attributes:
4889+
4890+ ::: Warning ::::::
4891+ This is a warning.
4892+
4893+ ::: Danger
4894+ This is a warning within a warning.
4895+ :::
4896+ ::::::::::::::::::
4897+
4898+Fences without attributes are always closing fences. Unlike
4899+with fenced code blocks, the number of colons in the closing
4900+fence need not match the number in the opening fence. However,
4901+it can be helpful for visual clarity to use fences of different
4902+lengths to distinguish nested divs from their parents.
4903+
4904+
4905+#### Extension: `bracketed_spans` ####
4906+
4907+A bracketed sequence of inlines, as one would use to begin
4908+a link, will be treated as a `Span` with attributes if it is
4909+followed immediately by attributes:
4910+
4911+ [This is *some text*]{.class key="val"}
4912+
4913+## Footnotes
4914+
4915+#### Extension: `footnotes` ####
4916+
4917+Pandoc's Markdown allows footnotes, using the following syntax:
4918+
4919+ Here is a footnote reference,[^1] and another.[^longnote]
4920+
4921+ [^1]: Here is the footnote.
4922+
4923+ [^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
4924+
4925+ Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
4926+ belong to the previous footnote.
4927+
4928+ { some.code }
4929+
4930+ The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
4931+ line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
4932+ multi-paragraph list items.
4933+
4934+ This paragraph won't be part of the note, because it
4935+ isn't indented.
4936+
4937+The identifiers in footnote references may not contain spaces, tabs,
4938+or newlines. These identifiers are used only to correlate the
4939+footnote reference with the note itself; in the output, footnotes
4940+will be numbered sequentially.
4941+
4942+The footnotes themselves need not be placed at the end of the
4943+document. They may appear anywhere except inside other block elements
4944+(lists, block quotes, tables, etc.). Each footnote should be
4945+separated from surrounding content (including other footnotes)
4946+by blank lines.
4947+
4948+#### Extension: `inline_notes` ####
4949+
4950+Inline footnotes are also allowed (though, unlike regular notes,
4951+they cannot contain multiple paragraphs). The syntax is as follows:
4952+
4953+ Here is an inline note.^[Inlines notes are easier to write, since
4954+ you don't have to pick an identifier and move down to type the
4955+ note.]
4956+
4957+Inline and regular footnotes may be mixed freely.
4958+
4959+## Citation syntax
4960+
4961+#### Extension: `citations` ####
4962+
4963+To cite a bibliographic item with an identifier foo, use the
4964+syntax `@foo`. Normal citations should be included in square
4965+brackets, with semicolons separating distinct items:
4966+
4967+ Blah blah [@doe99; @smith2000; @smith2004].
4968+
4969+How this is rendered depends on the citation style. In an
4970+author-date style, it might render as
4971+
4972+ Blah blah (Doe 1999, Smith 2000, 2004).
4973+
4974+In a footnote style, it might render as
4975+
4976+ Blah blah.[^1]
4977+
4978+ [^1]: John Doe, "Frogs," *Journal of Amphibians* 44 (1999);
4979+ Susan Smith, "Flies," *Journal of Insects* (2000);
4980+ Susan Smith, "Bees," *Journal of Insects* (2004).
4981+
4982+See the [CSL user documentation] for more information about CSL
4983+styles and how they affect rendering.
4984+
4985+Unless a citation key start with a letter, digit, or `_`,
4986+and contains only alphanumerics and internal punctuation
4987+characters (`:.#$%&-+?<>~/`), it must be surrounded
4988+by curly braces, which are not considered part of the key.
4989+In `@Foo_bar.baz.`, the key is `Foo_bar.baz`. The final
4990+period is not *internal* punctuation, so it is not included in
4991+the key. In `@{Foo_bar.baz.}`, the key is `Foo_bar.baz.`, including
4992+the final period. The curly braces are recommended if you use URLs as
4993+keys: `[@{https://example.com/bib?name=foobar&date=2000}, p. 33]`.
4994+
4995+Citation items may optionally include a prefix, a locator, and
4996+a suffix. In
4997+
4998+ Blah blah [see @doe99, pp. 33-35 and *passim*; @smith04, chap. 1].
4999+
5000+The first item (`doe99`) has prefix `see `, locator `pp. 33-35`,
5001+and suffix `and *passim*`. The second item (`smith04`) has
5002+locator `chap. 1` and no prefix or suffix.
5003+
5004+Pandoc uses some heuristics to separate the locator from the
5005+rest of the subject. It is sensitive to the locator terms
5006+defined in the [CSL locale files]. Either abbreviated or
5007+unabbreviated forms are accepted. In the `en-US` locale, locator
5008+terms can be written in either singular or plural forms, as
5009+`book`, `bk.`/`bks.`; `chapter`, `chap.`/`chaps.`; `column`,
5010+`col.`/`cols.`; `figure`, `fig.`/`figs.`; `folio`,
5011+`fol.`/`fols.`; `number`, `no.`/`nos.`; `line`, `l.`/`ll.`;
5012+`note`, `n.`/`nn.`; `opus`, `op.`/`opp.`; `page`, `p.`/`pp.`;
5013+`paragraph`, `para.`/`paras.`; `part`, `pt.`/`pts.`; `section`,
5014+`sec.`/`secs.`; `sub verbo`, `s.v.`/`s.vv.`; `verse`,
5015+`v.`/`vv.`; `volume`, `vol.`/`vols.`; `¶`/`¶¶`; `§`/`§§`. If no
5016+locator term is used, "page" is assumed.
5017+
5018+In complex cases, you can force something to be treated as
5019+a locator by enclosing it in curly braces or prevent parsing
5020+the suffix as locator by prepending curly braces:
5021+
5022+ [@smith{ii, A, D-Z}, with a suffix]
5023+ [@smith, {pp. iv, vi-xi, (xv)-(xvii)} with suffix here]
5024+ [@smith{}, 99 years later]
5025+
5026+A minus sign (`-`) before the `@` will suppress mention of
5027+the author in the citation. This can be useful when the
5028+author is already mentioned in the text:
5029+
5030+ Smith says blah [-@smith04].
5031+
5032+You can also write an author-in-text citation, by omitting the
5033+square brackets:
5034+
5035+ @smith04 says blah.
5036+
5037+ @smith04 [p. 33] says blah.
5038+
5039+This will cause the author's name to be rendered, followed by
5040+the bibliographical details. Use this form when you want to
5041+make the citation the subject of a sentence.
5042+
5043+When you are using a note style, it is usually better to let
5044+citeproc create the footnotes from citations rather than writing
5045+an explicit note. If you do write an explicit note that
5046+contains a citation, note that normal citations will be put in
5047+parentheses, while author-in-text citations will not. For
5048+this reason, it is sometimes preferable to use the
5049+author-in-text style inside notes when using a note style.
5050+
5051+[CSL user documentation]: https://citationstyles.org/authors/
5052+[CSL]: https://docs.citationstyles.org/en/stable/specification.html
5053+[CSL markup specs]: https://docs.citationstyles.org/en/1.0/release-notes.html#rich-text-markup-within-fields
5054+[Chicago Manual of Style]: https://chicagomanualofstyle.org
5055+[Citation Style Language]: https://citationstyles.org
5056+[Zotero Style Repository]: https://www.zotero.org/styles
5057+[finding and editing styles]: https://citationstyles.org/authors/
5058+[CSL locale files]: https://github.com/citation-style-language/locales
5059+
5060+## Non-default extensions
5061+
5062+The following Markdown syntax extensions are not enabled by default
5063+in pandoc, but may be enabled by adding `+EXTENSION` to the format
5064+name, where `EXTENSION` is the name of the extension. Thus, for
5065+example, `markdown+hard_line_breaks` is Markdown with hard line breaks.
5066+
5067+#### Extension: `rebase_relative_paths` ####
5068+
5069+Rewrite relative paths for Markdown links and images, depending
5070+on the path of the file containing the link or image link. For
5071+each link or image, pandoc will compute the directory of the
5072+containing file, relative to the working directory, and prepend
5073+the resulting path to the link or image path.
5074+
5075+The use of this extension is best understood by example.
5076+Suppose you have a a subdirectory for each chapter of a book,
5077+`chap1`, `chap2`, `chap3`. Each contains a file `text.md` and a
5078+number of images used in the chapter. You would like to have
5079+`` in `chap1/text.md` refer to
5080+`chap1/spider.jpg` and `` in `chap2/text.md`
5081+refer to `chap2/spider.jpg`. To do this, use
5082+
5083+ pandoc chap*/*.md -f markdown+rebase_relative_paths
5084+
5085+Without this extension, you would have to use
5086+`` in `chap1/text.md` and
5087+`` in `chap2/text.md`. Links with
5088+relative paths will be rewritten in the same way as images.
5089+
5090+Absolute paths and URLs are not changed. Neither are empty
5091+paths or paths consisting entirely of a fragment, e.g., `#foo`.
5092+
5093+Note that relative paths in reference links and images will
5094+be rewritten relative to the file containing the link
5095+reference definition, not the file containing the reference link
5096+or image itself, if these differ.
5097+
5098+#### Extension: `attributes` ####
5099+
5100+Allows attributes to be attached to any inline or block-level
5101+element. The syntax for the attributes is the same as that
5102+used in [`header_attributes`][Extension: `header_attributes`].
5103+
5104+- Attributes that occur immediately after an inline
5105+ element affect that element. If they follow a space, then they
5106+ belong to the space. (Hence, this option subsumes
5107+ `inline_code_attributes` and `link_attributes`.)
5108+- Attributes that occur immediately before a block
5109+ element, on a line by themselves, affect that
5110+ element.
5111+- Consecutive attribute specifiers may be used,
5112+ either for blocks or for inlines. Their attributes
5113+ will be combined.
5114+- Attributes that occur at the end of the text of
5115+ a Setext or ATX heading (separated by whitespace
5116+ from the text) affect the heading element. (Hence, this
5117+ option subsumes `header_attributes`.)
5118+- Attributes that occur after the opening fence
5119+ in a fenced code block affect the code block element. (Hence,
5120+ this option subsumes `fenced_code_attributes`.)
5121+- Attributes that occur at the end of a reference
5122+ link definition affect links that refer to that
5123+ definition.
5124+
5125+Note that pandoc's AST does not currently allow attributes
5126+to be attached to arbitrary elements. Hence a Span or Div
5127+container will be added if needed.
5128+
5129+#### Extension: `old_dashes` ####
5130+
5131+Selects the pandoc <= 1.8.2.1 behavior for parsing smart dashes:
5132+`-` before a numeral is an en-dash, and `--` is an em-dash.
5133+This option only has an effect if `smart` is enabled. It is
5134+selected automatically for `textile` input.
5135+
5136+#### Extension: `angle_brackets_escapable` ####
5137+
5138+Allow `<` and `>` to be backslash-escaped, as they can be in
5139+GitHub flavored Markdown but not original Markdown. This is
5140+implied by pandoc's default `all_symbols_escapable`.
31935141
3194−#### Extension: `shortcut_reference_links` ####
5142+#### Extension: `lists_without_preceding_blankline` ####
31955143
3196−In a *shortcut* reference link, the second pair of brackets may
3197−be omitted entirely:
5144+Allow a list to occur right after a paragraph, with no intervening
5145+blank space.
31985146
3199− See [my website].
5147+#### Extension: `four_space_rule` ####
32005148
3201− [my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
5149+Selects the pandoc <= 2.0 behavior for parsing lists, so that
5150+four spaces indent are needed for list item continuation
5151+paragraphs.
32025152
3203−### Internal links ###
5153+#### Extension: `spaced_reference_links` ####
32045154
3205−To link to another section of the same document, use the automatically
3206−generated identifier (see [Header identifiers]). For example:
5155+Allow whitespace between the two components of a reference link,
5156+for example,
32075157
3208− See the [Introduction](#introduction).
5158+ [foo] [bar].
32095159
3210−or
5160+#### Extension: `hard_line_breaks` ####
32115161
3212− See the [Introduction].
5162+Causes all newlines within a paragraph to be interpreted as hard line
5163+breaks instead of spaces.
32135164
3214− [Introduction]: #introduction
5165+#### Extension: `ignore_line_breaks` ####
32155166
3216−Internal links are currently supported for HTML formats (including
3217−HTML slide shows and EPUB), LaTeX, and ConTeXt.
5167+Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
5168+treated as spaces or as hard line breaks. This option is intended for
5169+use with East Asian languages where spaces are not used between words,
5170+but text is divided into lines for readability.
32185171
3219−Images
3220−------
5172+#### Extension: `east_asian_line_breaks` ####
32215173
3222−A link immediately preceded by a `!` will be treated as an image.
3223−The link text will be used as the image's alt text:
5174+Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than
5175+being treated as spaces or as hard line breaks, when they occur
5176+between two East Asian wide characters. This is a better choice
5177+than `ignore_line_breaks` for texts that include a mix of East
5178+Asian wide characters and other characters.
32245179
3225− 
5180+#### Extension: `emoji` ####
32265181
3227− ![movie reel]
5182+Parses textual emojis like `:smile:` as Unicode emoticons.
32285183
3229− [movie reel]: movie.gif
5184+#### Extension: `tex_math_single_backslash` ####
32305185
3231−#### Extension: `implicit_figures` ####
5186+Causes anything between `\(` and `\)` to be interpreted as inline
5187+TeX math, and anything between `\[` and `\]` to be interpreted
5188+as display TeX math. Note: a drawback of this extension is that
5189+it precludes escaping `(` and `[`.
32325190
3233−An image with nonempty alt text, occurring by itself in a
3234−paragraph, will be rendered as a figure with a caption. The
3235−image's alt text will be used as the caption.
5191+#### Extension: `tex_math_double_backslash` ####
32365192
3237− 
5193+Causes anything between `\\(` and `\\)` to be interpreted as inline
5194+TeX math, and anything between `\\[` and `\\]` to be interpreted
5195+as display TeX math.
32385196
3239−How this is rendered depends on the output format. Some output
3240−formats (e.g. RTF) do not yet support figures. In those
3241−formats, you'll just get an image in a paragraph by itself, with
3242−no caption.
5197+#### Extension: `markdown_attribute` ####
32435198
3244−If you just want a regular inline image, just make sure it is not
3245−the only thing in the paragraph. One way to do this is to insert a
3246−nonbreaking space after the image:
5199+By default, pandoc interprets material inside block-level tags as Markdown.
5200+This extension changes the behavior so that Markdown is only parsed
5201+inside block-level tags if the tags have the attribute `markdown=1`.
32475202
3248− \
5203+#### Extension: `mmd_title_block` ####
32495204
3250−Note that in reveal.js slide shows, an image in a paragraph
3251−by itself that has the `stretch` class will fill the screen,
3252−and the caption and figure tags will be omitted.
5205+Enables a [MultiMarkdown] style title block at the top of
5206+the document, for example:
32535207
3254−#### Extension: `link_attributes` ####
5208+ Title: My title
5209+ Author: John Doe
5210+ Date: September 1, 2008
5211+ Comment: This is a sample mmd title block, with
5212+ a field spanning multiple lines.
32555213
3256−Attributes can be set on links and images:
5214+See the MultiMarkdown documentation for details. If `pandoc_title_block` or
5215+`yaml_metadata_block` is enabled, it will take precedence over
5216+`mmd_title_block`.
32575217
3258− An inline {#id .class width=30 height=20px}
3259− and a reference ![image][ref] with attributes.
5218+#### Extension: `abbreviations` ####
32605219
3261− [ref]: foo.jpg "optional title" {#id .class key=val key2="val 2"}
5220+Parses PHP Markdown Extra abbreviation keys, like
32625221
3263−(This syntax is compatible with [PHP Markdown Extra] when only `#id`
3264−and `.class` are used.)
5222+ *[HTML]: Hypertext Markup Language
32655223
3266−For HTML and EPUB, all attributes except `width` and `height` (but
3267−including `srcset` and `sizes`) are passed through as is. The other
3268−writers ignore attributes that are not supported by their output
3269−format.
5224+Note that the pandoc document model does not support
5225+abbreviations, so if this extension is enabled, abbreviation keys are
5226+simply skipped (as opposed to being parsed as paragraphs).
32705227
3271−The `width` and `height` attributes on images are treated specially. When
3272−used without a unit, the unit is assumed to be pixels. However, any of
3273−the following unit identifiers can be used: `px`, `cm`, `mm`, `in`, `inch`
3274−and `%`. There must not be any spaces between the number and the unit.
3275−For example:
5228+#### Extension: `autolink_bare_uris` ####
32765229
3277−```
3278−{ width=50% }
3279−```
5230+Makes all absolute URIs into links, even when not surrounded by
5231+pointy braces `<...>`.
32805232
3281−- Dimensions are converted to inches for output in page-based formats like
3282− LaTeX. Dimensions are converted to pixels for output in HTML-like
3283− formats. Use the `--dpi` option to specify the number of pixels per
3284− inch. The default is 96dpi.
3285−- The `%` unit is generally relative to some available space.
3286− For example the above example will render to
3287− `<img href="file.jpg" style="width: 50%;" />` (HTML),
3288− `\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{file.jpg}` (LaTeX), or
3289− `\externalfigure[file.jpg][width=0.5\textwidth]` (ConTeXt).
3290−- Some output formats have a notion of a class
3291− ([ConTeXt](http://wiki.contextgarden.net/Using_Graphics#Multiple_Image_Settings))
3292− or a unique identifier (LaTeX `\caption`), or both (HTML).
3293−- When no `width` or `height` attributes are specified, the fallback
3294− is to look at the image resolution and the dpi metadata embedded in
3295− the image file.
5233+#### Extension: `mmd_link_attributes` ####
32965234
3297−Spans
3298−-----
5235+Parses multimarkdown style key-value attributes on link
5236+and image references. This extension should not be confused with the
5237+[`link_attributes`](#extension-link_attributes) extension.
32995238
3300−#### Extension: `bracketed_spans` ####
5239+ This is a reference ![image][ref] with multimarkdown attributes.
33015240
3302−A bracketed sequence of inlines, as one would use to begin
3303−a link, will be treated as a span with attributes if it is
3304−followed immediately by attributes:
5241+ [ref]: https://path.to/image "Image title" width=20px height=30px
5242+ id=myId class="myClass1 myClass2"
33055243
3306− [This is *some text*]{.class key="val"}
5244+#### Extension: `mmd_header_identifiers` ####
33075245
3308−Footnotes
3309−---------
5246+Parses multimarkdown style heading identifiers (in square brackets,
5247+after the heading but before any trailing `#`s in an ATX heading).
33105248
3311−#### Extension: `footnotes` ####
5249+#### Extension: `compact_definition_lists` ####
33125250
3313−Pandoc's Markdown allows footnotes, using the following syntax:
5251+Activates the definition list syntax of pandoc 1.12.x and earlier.
5252+This syntax differs from the one described above under [Definition lists]
5253+in several respects:
33145254
3315− Here is a footnote reference,[^1] and another.[^longnote]
5255+ - No blank line is required between consecutive items of the
5256+ definition list.
5257+ - To get a "tight" or "compact" list, omit space between consecutive
5258+ items; the space between a term and its definition does not affect
5259+ anything.
5260+ - Lazy wrapping of paragraphs is not allowed: the entire definition must
5261+ be indented four spaces.[^6]
33165262
3317− [^1]: Here is the footnote.
5263+[^6]: To see why laziness is incompatible with relaxing the requirement
5264+ of a blank line between items, consider the following example:
33185265
3319− [^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
5266+ bar
5267+ : definition
5268+ foo
5269+ : definition
33205270
3321− Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
3322− belong to the previous footnote.
5271+ Is this a single list item with two definitions of "bar," the first of
5272+ which is lazily wrapped, or two list items? To remove the ambiguity
5273+ we must either disallow lazy wrapping or require a blank line between
5274+ list items.
33235275
3324− { some.code }
5276+#### Extension: `gutenberg` ####
33255277
3326− The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
3327− line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
3328− multi-paragraph list items.
5278+Use [Project Gutenberg] conventions for `plain` output:
5279+all-caps for strong emphasis, surround by underscores
5280+for regular emphasis, add extra blank space around headings.
33295281
3330− This paragraph won't be part of the note, because it
3331− isn't indented.
5282+ [Project Gutenberg]: https://www.gutenberg.org
33325283
3333−The identifiers in footnote references may not contain spaces, tabs,
3334−or newlines. These identifiers are used only to correlate the
3335−footnote reference with the note itself; in the output, footnotes
3336−will be numbered sequentially.
5284+#### Extension: `sourcepos` ####
33375285
3338−The footnotes themselves need not be placed at the end of the
3339−document. They may appear anywhere except inside other block elements
3340−(lists, block quotes, tables, etc.). Each footnote should be
3341−separated from surrounding content (including other footnotes)
3342−by blank lines.
5286+Include source position attributes when parsing `commonmark`.
5287+For elements that accept attributes, a `data-pos` attribute
5288+is added; other elements are placed in a surrounding
5289+Div or Span elemnet with a `data-pos` attribute.
33435290
3344−#### Extension: `inline_notes` ####
5291+## Markdown variants
33455292
3346−Inline footnotes are also allowed (though, unlike regular notes,
3347−they cannot contain multiple paragraphs). The syntax is as follows:
5293+In addition to pandoc's extended Markdown, the following Markdown
5294+variants are supported:
33485295
3349− Here is an inline note.^[Inlines notes are easier to write, since
3350− you don't have to pick an identifier and move down to type the
3351− note.]
5296+- `markdown_phpextra` (PHP Markdown Extra)
5297+- `markdown_github` (deprecated GitHub-Flavored Markdown)
5298+- `markdown_mmd` (MultiMarkdown)
5299+- `markdown_strict` (Markdown.pl)
5300+- `commonmark` (CommonMark)
5301+- `gfm` (Github-Flavored Markdown)
5302+- `commonmark_x` (CommonMark with many pandoc extensions)
33525303
3353−Inline and regular footnotes may be mixed freely.
5304+To see which extensions are supported for a given format,
5305+and which are enabled by default, you can use the command
33545306
3355−Typography
3356−----------
5307+ pandoc --list-extensions=FORMAT
33575308
3358−#### Extension: `smart` ####
5309+where `FORMAT` is replaced with the name of the format.
33595310
3360−Interpret straight quotes as curly quotes, `---` as em-dashes,
3361−`--` as en-dashes, and `...` as ellipses. Nonbreaking spaces are
3362−inserted after certain abbreviations, such as "Mr." This
3363−option currently affects the input formats `markdown`,
3364−`commonmark`, `latex`, `mediawiki`, `org`, `rst`, and `twiki`,
3365−and the output formats `markdown`, `latex`, and `context`.
5311+Note that the list of extensions for `commonmark`,
5312+`gfm`, and `commonmark_x` are defined relative to default
5313+commonmark. So, for example, `backtick_code_blocks`
5314+does not appear as an extension, since it is enabled by
5315+default and cannot be disabled.
33665316
3367−Note: If you are *writing* Markdown, then the `smart` extension
3368−has the reverse effect: what would have been curly quotes comes
3369−out straight.
5317+# Citations
33705318
3371−In LaTeX, `smart` means to use the standard TeX ligatures
3372−for quotation marks (` `` ` and ` '' ` for double quotes,
3373−`` ` `` and `` ' `` for single quotes) and dashes (`--` for
3374−en-dash and `---` for em-dash). If `smart` is disabled,
3375−then in reading LaTeX pandoc will parse these characters
3376−literally. In writing LaTeX, enabling `smart` tells pandoc
3377−to use the ligatures when possible; if `smart` is disabled
3378−pandoc will use unicode quotation mark and dash characters.
5319+When the `--citeproc` option is used, pandoc can automatically generate
5320+citations and a bibliography in a number of styles. Basic usage is
33795321
3380−Citations
3381−---------
5322+ pandoc --citeproc myinput.txt
33825323
3383−#### Extension: `citations` ####
5324+To use this feature, you will need to have
33845325
3385−Using an external filter, `pandoc-citeproc`, pandoc can automatically generate
3386−citations and a bibliography in a number of styles. Basic usage is
5326+- a document containing citations (see [Extension: `citations`]);
5327+- a source of bibliographic data: either an external bibliography
5328+ file or a list of `references` in the document's YAML metadata
5329+- optionally, a [CSL] citation style.
33875330
3388− pandoc --filter pandoc-citeproc myinput.txt
5331+## Specifying bibliographic data
33895332
3390−In order to use this feature, you will need to specify a bibliography file
3391−using the `bibliography` metadata field in a YAML metadata section, or
3392−`--bibliography` command line argument. You can supply multiple `--bibliography`
3393−arguments or set `bibliography` metadata field to YAML array, if you want to
3394−use multiple bibliography files. The bibliography may have any of these
3395−formats:
5333+You can specify an external bibliography using the
5334+`bibliography` metadata field in a YAML metadata section or the
5335+`--bibliography` command line argument. If you want to use
5336+multiple bibliography files, you can supply multiple
5337+`--bibliography` arguments or set `bibliography` metadata field
5338+to YAML array. A bibliography may have any of these formats:
33965339
33975340 Format File extension
33985341 ------------ --------------
33995342 BibLaTeX .bib
34005343 BibTeX .bibtex
3401− Copac .copac
34025344 CSL JSON .json
34035345 CSL YAML .yaml
3404− EndNote .enl
3405− EndNote XML .xml
3406− ISI .wos
3407− MEDLINE .medline
3408− MODS .mods
3409− RIS .ris
34105346
34115347Note that `.bib` can be used with both BibTeX and BibLaTeX files;
3412−use `.bibtex` to force BibTeX.
3413−
3414−Note that `pandoc-citeproc --bib2json` and `pandoc-citeproc --bib2yaml`
3415−can produce `.json` and `.yaml` files from any of the supported formats.
5348+use the extension `.bibtex` to force interpretation as BibTeX.
34165349
3417−In-field markup: In BibTeX and BibLaTeX databases, pandoc-citeproc parses
3418−a subset of LaTeX markup; in CSL YAML databases, pandoc Markdown; and in CSL JSON databases, an [HTML-like markup][CSL markup specs]:
5350+In BibTeX and BibLaTeX databases, pandoc parses LaTeX markup
5351+inside fields such as `title`; in CSL YAML databases, pandoc
5352+Markdown; and in CSL JSON databases, an [HTML-like markup][CSL
5353+markup specs]:
34195354
34205355`<i>...</i>`
34215356: italics
@@ -3435,14 +5370,11 @@ a subset of LaTeX markup; in CSL YAML databases, pandoc Markdown; and in CSL JSO
34355370`<span class="nocase">...</span>`
34365371: prevent a phrase from being capitalized as title case
34375372
3438−`pandoc-citeproc -j` and `-y` interconvert the CSL JSON
3439−and CSL YAML formats as far as possible.
3440−
3441−As an alternative to specifying a bibliography file using `--bibliography`
3442−or the YAML metadata field `bibliography`, you can include
3443−the citation data directly in the `references` field of the
3444−document's YAML metadata. The field should contain an array of
3445−YAML-encoded references, for example:
5373+As an alternative to specifying a bibliography file using
5374+`--bibliography` or the YAML metadata field `bibliography`, you
5375+can include the citation data directly in the `references` field
5376+of the document's YAML metadata. The field should contain an
5377+array of YAML-encoded references, for example:
34465378
34475379 ---
34485380 references:
@@ -3453,327 +5385,284 @@ YAML-encoded references, for example:
34535385 given: J. D.
34545386 - family: Crick
34555387 given: F. H. C.
3456− issued:
3457− date-parts:
3458− - - 1953
3459− - 4
3460− - 25
3461− title: 'Molecular structure of nucleic acids: a structure for deoxyribose
3462− nucleic acid'
3463− title-short: Molecular structure of nucleic acids
3464− container-title: Nature
3465− volume: 171
3466− issue: 4356
3467− page: 737-738
3468− DOI: 10.1038/171737a0
3469− URL: http://www.nature.com/nature/journal/v171/n4356/abs/171737a0.html
3470− language: en-GB
3471− ...
3472−
3473−(`pandoc-citeproc --bib2yaml` can produce these from a bibliography file in one
3474−of the supported formats.)
3475−
3476−Citations and references can be formatted using any style supported by the
3477−[Citation Style Language], listed in the [Zotero Style Repository].
3478−These files are specified using the `--csl` option or the `csl` metadata field.
3479−By default, `pandoc-citeproc` will use the [Chicago Manual of Style] author-date
3480−format. The CSL project provides further information on [finding and editing styles].
3481−
3482−To make your citations hyperlinks to the corresponding bibliography
3483−entries, add `link-citations: true` to your YAML metadata.
3484−
3485−Citations go inside square brackets and are separated by semicolons.
3486−Each citation must have a key, composed of '@' + the citation
3487−identifier from the database, and may optionally have a prefix,
3488−a locator, and a suffix. The citation key must begin with a letter, digit,
3489−or `_`, and may contain alphanumerics, `_`, and internal punctuation
3490−characters (`:.#$%&-+?<>~/`). Here are some examples:
3491−
3492− Blah blah [see @doe99, pp. 33-35; also @smith04, chap. 1].
3493−
3494− Blah blah [@doe99, pp. 33-35, 38-39 and *passim*].
3495−
3496− Blah blah [@smith04; @doe99].
3497−
3498−`pandoc-citeproc` detects locator terms in the [CSL locale files].
3499−Either abbreviated or unabbreviated forms are accepted. In the `en-US`
3500−locale, locator terms can be written in either singular or plural forms,
3501−as `book`, `bk.`/`bks.`; `chapter`, `chap.`/`chaps.`; `column`,
3502−`col.`/`cols.`; `figure`, `fig.`/`figs.`; `folio`, `fol.`/`fols.`;
3503−`number`, `no.`/`nos.`; `line`, `l.`/`ll.`; `note`, `n.`/`nn.`; `opus`,
3504−`op.`/`opp.`; `page`, `p.`/`pp.`; `paragraph`, `para.`/`paras.`; `part`,
3505−`pt.`/`pts.`; `section`, `sec.`/`secs.`; `sub verbo`, `s.v.`/`s.vv.`;
3506−`verse`, `v.`/`vv.`; `volume`, `vol.`/`vols.`; `¶`/`¶¶`; `§`/`§§`. If no
3507−locator term is used, "page" is assumed.
3508−
3509−A minus sign (`-`) before the `@` will suppress mention of
3510−the author in the citation. This can be useful when the
3511−author is already mentioned in the text:
3512−
3513− Smith says blah [-@smith04].
3514−
3515−You can also write an in-text citation, as follows:
3516−
3517− @smith04 says blah.
3518−
3519− @smith04 [p. 33] says blah.
3520−
3521−If the style calls for a list of works cited, it will be placed
3522−at the end of the document. Normally, you will want to end your
3523−document with an appropriate header:
3524−
3525− last paragraph...
3526−
3527− # References
3528−
3529−The bibliography will be inserted after this header. Note that
3530−the `unnumbered` class will be added to this header, so that the
3531−section will not be numbered.
3532−
3533−If you want to include items in the bibliography without actually
3534−citing them in the body text, you can define a dummy `nocite` metadata
3535−field and put the citations there:
3536−
3537− ---
3538− nocite: |
3539− @item1, @item2
3540− ...
3541−
3542− @item3
3543−
3544−In this example, the document will contain a citation for `item3`
3545−only, but the bibliography will contain entries for `item1`, `item2`, and
3546−`item3`.
3547−
3548−It is possible to create a bibliography with all the citations,
3549−whether or not they appear in the document, by using a wildcard:
3550−
3551− ---
3552− nocite: |
3553− @*
5388+ issued:
5389+ date-parts:
5390+ - - 1953
5391+ - 4
5392+ - 25
5393+ title: 'Molecular structure of nucleic acids: a structure for
5394+ deoxyribose nucleic acid'
5395+ title-short: Molecular structure of nucleic acids
5396+ container-title: Nature
5397+ volume: 171
5398+ issue: 4356
5399+ page: 737-738
5400+ DOI: 10.1038/171737a0
5401+ URL: https://www.nature.com/articles/171737a0
5402+ language: en-GB
35545403 ...
35555404
3556−For LaTeX or PDF output, you can also use [`natbib`] or [`biblatex`]
3557−to render bibliography. In order to do so, specify bibliography files as
3558−outlined above, and add `--natbib` or `--biblatex` argument to `pandoc`
3559−invocation. Bear in mind that bibliography files have to be in respective
3560−format (either BibTeX or BibLaTeX).
5405+If both an external bibliography and inline (YAML metadata)
5406+references are provided, both will be used. In case of
5407+conflicting `id`s, the inline references will take precedence.
35615408
3562−For more information, see the [pandoc-citeproc man page].
5409+Note that `pandoc` can be used to produce such a YAML metadata
5410+section from a BibTeX, BibLaTeX, or CSL JSON bibliography:
35635411
3564−[CSL markup specs]: http://docs.citationstyles.org/en/1.0/release-notes.html#rich-text-markup-within-fields
3565−[Chicago Manual of Style]: http://chicagomanualofstyle.org
3566−[Citation Style Language]: http://citationstyles.org
3567−[Zotero Style Repository]: https://www.zotero.org/styles
3568−[finding and editing styles]: http://citationstyles.org/styles/
3569−[CSL locale files]: https://github.com/citation-style-language/locales
3570−[pandoc-citeproc man page]: https://github.com/jgm/pandoc-citeproc/blob/master/man/pandoc-citeproc.1.md
5412+ pandoc chem.bib -s -f biblatex -t markdown
5413+ pandoc chem.json -s -f csljson -t markdown
35715414
3572−Non-pandoc extensions
3573−---------------------
5415+Indeed, `pandoc` can convert between any of these
5416+citation formats:
35745417
3575−The following Markdown syntax extensions are not enabled by default
3576−in pandoc, but may be enabled by adding `+EXTENSION` to the format
3577−name, where `EXTENSION` is the name of the extension. Thus, for
3578−example, `markdown+hard_line_breaks` is Markdown with hard line breaks.
5418+ pandoc chem.bib -s -f biblatex -t csljson
5419+ pandoc chem.yaml -s -f markdown -t biblatex
35795420
3580−#### Extension: `old_dashes` ####
5421+Running pandoc on a bibliography file with the `--citeproc`
5422+option will create a formatted bibliography in the format
5423+of your choice:
35815424
3582−Selects the pandoc <= 1.8.2.1 behavior for parsing smart dashes:
3583−`-` before a numeral is an en-dash, and `--` is an em-dash.
3584−This option only has an effect if `smart` is enabled. It is
3585−selected automatically for `textile` input.
5425+ pandoc chem.bib -s --citeproc -o chem.html
5426+ pandoc chem.bib -s --citeproc -o chem.pdf
35865427
3587−#### Extension: `angle_brackets_escapable` ####
5428+### Capitalization in titles
35885429
3589−Allow `<` and `>` to be backslash-escaped, as they can be in
3590−GitHub flavored Markdown but not original Markdown. This is
3591−implied by pandoc's default `all_symbols_escapable`.
5430+If you are using a bibtex or biblatex bibliography, then observe
5431+the following rules:
35925432
3593−#### Extension: `lists_without_preceding_blankline` ####
5433+ - English titles should be in title case. Non-English titles should
5434+ be in sentence case, and the `langid` field in biblatex should be
5435+ set to the relevant language. (The following values are treated
5436+ as English: `american`, `british`, `canadian`, `english`,
5437+ `australian`, `newzealand`, `USenglish`, or `UKenglish`.)
35945438
3595−Allow a list to occur right after a paragraph, with no intervening
3596−blank space.
5439+ - As is standard with bibtex/biblatex, proper names should be
5440+ protected with curly braces so that they won't be lowercased
5441+ in styles that call for sentence case. For example:
35975442
3598−#### Extension: `spaced_reference_links` ####
5443+ title = {My Dinner with {Andre}}
35995444
3600−Allow whitespace between the two components of a reference link,
3601−for example,
5445+ - In addition, words that should remain lowercase (or camelCase)
5446+ should be protected:
36025447
3603− [foo] [bar].
5448+ title = {Spin Wave Dispersion on the {nm} Scale}
36045449
3605−#### Extension: `hard_line_breaks` ####
5450+ Though this is not necessary in bibtex/biblatex, it is necessary
5451+ with citeproc, which stores titles internally in sentence case,
5452+ and converts to title case in styles that require it. Here we
5453+ protect "nm" so that it doesn't get converted to "Nm" at this stage.
36065454
3607−Causes all newlines within a paragraph to be interpreted as hard line
3608−breaks instead of spaces.
5455+If you are using a CSL bibliography (either JSON or YAML), then observe
5456+the following rules:
36095457
3610−#### Extension: `ignore_line_breaks` ####
5458+ - All titles should be in sentence case.
36115459
3612−Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
3613−treated as spaces or as hard line breaks. This option is intended for
3614−use with East Asian languages where spaces are not used between words,
3615−but text is divided into lines for readability.
5460+ - Use the `language` field for non-English titles to prevent their
5461+ conversion to title case in styles that call for this. (Conversion
5462+ happens only if `language` begins with `en` or is left empty.)
36165463
3617−#### Extension: `east_asian_line_breaks` ####
5464+ - Protect words that should not be converted to title case using
5465+ this syntax:
36185466
3619−Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than
3620−being treated as spaces or as hard line breaks, when they occur
3621−between two East Asian wide characters. This is a better choice
3622−than `ignore_line_breaks` for texts that include a mix of East
3623−Asian wide characters and other characters.
5467+ Spin wave dispersion on the <span class="nocase">nm</span> scale
36245468
3625−##### Extension: `emoji` ####
5469+### Conference Papers, Published vs. Unpublished
36265470
3627−Parses textual emojis like `:smile:` as Unicode emoticons.
5471+For a formally published conference paper, use the biblatex entry type
5472+`inproceedings` (which will be mapped to CSL `paper-conference`).
36285473
3629−#### Extension: `tex_math_single_backslash` ####
5474+For an unpublished manuscript, use the biblatex entry type
5475+`unpublished` without an `eventtitle` field (this entry type
5476+will be mapped to CSL `manuscript`).
36305477
3631−Causes anything between `\(` and `\)` to be interpreted as inline
3632−TeX math, and anything between `\[` and `\]` to be interpreted
3633−as display TeX math. Note: a drawback of this extension is that
3634−it precludes escaping `(` and `[`.
5478+For a talk, an unpublished conference paper, or a poster
5479+presentation, use the biblatex entry type `unpublished` with an
5480+`eventtitle` field (this entry type will be mapped to CSL
5481+`speech`). Use the biblatex `type` field to indicate the type,
5482+e.g. "Paper", or "Poster". `venue` and `eventdate` may be useful
5483+too, though `eventdate` will not be rendered by most CSL styles.
5484+Note that `venue` is for the event's venue, unlike `location`
5485+which describes the publisher's location; do not use the latter
5486+for an unpublished conference paper.
36355487
3636−#### Extension: `tex_math_double_backslash` ####
36375488
3638−Causes anything between `\\(` and `\\)` to be interpreted as inline
3639−TeX math, and anything between `\\[` and `\\]` to be interpreted
3640−as display TeX math.
5489+## Specifying a citation style
36415490
3642−#### Extension: `markdown_attribute` ####
5491+Citations and references can be formatted using any style supported by the
5492+[Citation Style Language], listed in the [Zotero Style Repository].
5493+These files are specified using the `--csl` option or the `csl`
5494+(or `citation-style`) metadata field. By default, pandoc will
5495+use the [Chicago Manual of Style] author-date format. (You can
5496+override this default by copying a CSL style of your choice
5497+to `default.csl` in your user data directory.)
5498+The CSL project provides further information on [finding and
5499+editing styles].
5500+
5501+The `--citation-abbreviations` option (or the
5502+`citation-abbreviations` metadata field) may be used to specify
5503+a JSON file containing abbreviations of journals that should be
5504+used in formatted bibliographies when `form="short"` is
5505+specified. The format of the file can be illustrated with an
5506+example:
36435507
3644−By default, pandoc interprets material inside block-level tags as Markdown.
3645−This extension changes the behavior so that Markdown is only parsed
3646−inside block-level tags if the tags have the attribute `markdown=1`.
36475508
3648−#### Extension: `mmd_title_block` ####
5509+ { "default": {
5510+ "container-title": {
5511+ "Lloyd's Law Reports": "Lloyd's Rep",
5512+ "Estates Gazette": "EG",
5513+ "Scots Law Times": "SLT"
5514+ }
5515+ }
5516+ }
36495517
3650−Enables a [MultiMarkdown] style title block at the top of
3651−the document, for example:
36525518
3653− Title: My title
3654− Author: John Doe
3655− Date: September 1, 2008
3656− Comment: This is a sample mmd title block, with
3657− a field spanning multiple lines.
5519+## Citations in note styles
36585520
3659−See the MultiMarkdown documentation for details. If `pandoc_title_block` or
3660−`yaml_metadata_block` is enabled, it will take precedence over
3661−`mmd_title_block`.
5521+Pandoc's citation processing is designed to allow you to
5522+move between author-date, numerical, and note styles without
5523+modifying the markdown source. When you're using a note
5524+style, avoid inserting footnotes manually. Instead, insert
5525+citations just as you would in an author-date style---for
5526+example,
36625527
3663−#### Extension: `abbreviations` ####
5528+ Blah blah [@foo, p. 33].
36645529
3665−Parses PHP Markdown Extra abbreviation keys, like
5530+The footnote will be created automatically. Pandoc will take
5531+care of removing the space and moving the note before or
5532+after the period, depending on the setting of
5533+`notes-after-punctuation`, as described below in [Other relevant
5534+metadata fields].
36665535
3667− *[HTML]: Hypertext Markup Language
5536+In some cases you may need to put a citation inside a regular
5537+footnote. Normal citations in footnotes (such as `[@foo, p.
5538+33]`) will be rendered in parentheses. In-text citations (such
5539+as `@foo [p. 33]`) will be rendered without parentheses. (A
5540+comma will be added if appropriate.) Thus:
36685541
3669−Note that the pandoc document model does not support
3670−abbreviations, so if this extension is enabled, abbreviation keys are
3671−simply skipped (as opposed to being parsed as paragraphs).
5542+ [^1]: Some studies [@foo; @bar, p. 33] show that
5543+ frubulicious zoosnaps are quantical. For a survey
5544+ of the literature, see @baz [chap. 1].
36725545
3673−#### Extension: `autolink_bare_uris` ####
5546+## Raw content in a style
36745547
3675−Makes all absolute URIs into links, even when not surrounded by
3676−pointy braces `<...>`.
5548+To include raw content in a prefix, suffix, delimiter, or term,
5549+surround it with these tags indicating the format:
36775550
3678−#### Extension: `ascii_identifiers` ####
5551+ {{jats}}<ref>{{/jats}}
36795552
3680−Causes the identifiers produced by `auto_identifiers` to be pure ASCII.
3681−Accents are stripped off of accented Latin letters, and non-Latin
3682−letters are omitted.
5553+Without the tags, the string will be interpreted as a string
5554+and escaped in the output, rather than being passed through raw.
36835555
3684−#### Extension: `mmd_link_attributes` ####
5556+This feature allows stylesheets to be customized to give
5557+different output for different output formats. However,
5558+stylesheets customized in this way will not be usable
5559+by other CSL implementations.
36855560
3686−Parses multimarkdown style key-value attributes on link
3687−and image references. This extension should not be confused with the
3688−[`link_attributes`](#extension-link_attributes) extension.
36895561
3690− This is a reference ![image][ref] with multimarkdown attributes.
36915562
3692− [ref]: http://path.to/image "Image title" width=20px height=30px
3693− id=myId class="myClass1 myClass2"
5563+## Placement of the bibliography
36945564
3695−#### Extension: `mmd_header_identifiers` ####
5565+If the style calls for a list of works cited, it will be placed
5566+in a div with id `refs`, if one exists:
36965567
3697−Parses multimarkdown style header identifiers (in square brackets,
3698−after the header but before any trailing `#`s in an ATX header).
5568+ ::: {#refs}
5569+ :::
36995570
3700−#### Extension: `compact_definition_lists` ####
5571+Otherwise, it will be placed at the end of the document.
5572+Generation of the bibliography can be suppressed by setting
5573+`suppress-bibliography: true` in the YAML metadata.
37015574
3702−Activates the definition list syntax of pandoc 1.12.x and earlier.
3703−This syntax differs from the one described above under [Definition lists]
3704−in several respects:
5575+If you wish the bibliography to have a section heading, you can
5576+set `reference-section-title` in the metadata, or put the heading
5577+at the beginning of the div with id `refs` (if you are using it)
5578+or at the end of your document:
37055579
3706− - No blank line is required between consecutive items of the
3707− definition list.
3708− - To get a "tight" or "compact" list, omit space between consecutive
3709− items; the space between a term and its definition does not affect
3710− anything.
3711− - Lazy wrapping of paragraphs is not allowed: the entire definition must
3712− be indented four spaces.[^6]
5580+ last paragraph...
37135581
3714−[^6]: To see why laziness is incompatible with relaxing the requirement
3715− of a blank line between items, consider the following example:
5582+ # References
37165583
3717− bar
3718− : definition
3719− foo
3720− : definition
5584+The bibliography will be inserted after this heading. Note that
5585+the `unnumbered` class will be added to this heading, so that the
5586+section will not be numbered.
37215587
3722− Is this a single list item with two definitions of "bar," the first of
3723− which is lazily wrapped, or two list items? To remove the ambiguity
3724− we must either disallow lazy wrapping or require a blank line between
3725− list items.
5588+## Including uncited items in the bibliography
37265589
3727−Markdown variants
3728−-----------------
5590+If you want to include items in the bibliography without actually
5591+citing them in the body text, you can define a dummy `nocite` metadata
5592+field and put the citations there:
37295593
3730−In addition to pandoc's extended Markdown, the following Markdown
3731−variants are supported:
5594+ ---
5595+ nocite: |
5596+ @item1, @item2
5597+ ...
37325598
3733−`markdown_phpextra` (PHP Markdown Extra)
3734−: `footnotes`, `pipe_tables`, `raw_html`, `markdown_attribute`,
3735− `fenced_code_blocks`, `definition_lists`, `intraword_underscores`,
3736− `header_attributes`, `link_attributes`, `abbreviations`,
3737− `shortcut_reference_links`.
5599+ @item3
37385600
3739−`markdown_github` (GitHub-Flavored Markdown)
3740−: `pipe_tables`, `raw_html`, `fenced_code_blocks`, `auto_identifiers`,
3741− `ascii_identifiers`, `backtick_code_blocks`, `autolink_bare_uris`,
3742− `intraword_underscores`, `strikeout`, `hard_line_breaks`, `emoji`,
3743− `shortcut_reference_links`, `angle_brackets_escapable`.
5601+In this example, the document will contain a citation for `item3`
5602+only, but the bibliography will contain entries for `item1`, `item2`, and
5603+`item3`.
37445604
3745−`markdown_mmd` (MultiMarkdown)
3746−: `pipe_tables`, `raw_html`, `markdown_attribute`, `mmd_link_attributes`,
3747− `tex_math_double_backslash`, `intraword_underscores`,
3748− `mmd_title_block`, `footnotes`, `definition_lists`,
3749− `all_symbols_escapable`, `implicit_header_references`,
3750− `auto_identifiers`, `mmd_header_identifiers`,
3751− `shortcut_reference_links`.
5605+It is possible to create a bibliography with all the citations,
5606+whether or not they appear in the document, by using a wildcard:
37525607
3753−`markdown_strict` (Markdown.pl)
3754−: `raw_html`
5608+ ---
5609+ nocite: |
5610+ @*
5611+ ...
37555612
3756−Extensions with formats other than Markdown
3757−-------------------------------------------
5613+For LaTeX output, you can also use [`natbib`] or [`biblatex`] to
5614+render the bibliography. In order to do so, specify bibliography
5615+files as outlined above, and add `--natbib` or `--biblatex`
5616+argument to `pandoc` invocation. Bear in mind that bibliography
5617+files have to be in either BibTeX (for `--natbib`)
5618+or BibLaTeX (for `--biblatex`) format.
37585619
3759−Some of the extensions discussed above can be used with formats
3760−other than Markdown:
5620+## Other relevant metadata fields
37615621
3762−* `auto_identifiers` can be used with `latex`, `rst`, `mediawiki`,
3763− and `textile` input (and is used by default).
5622+A few other metadata fields affect bibliography formatting:
37645623
3765−* `tex_math_dollars`, `tex_math_single_backslash`, and
3766− `tex_math_double_backslash` can be used with `html` input.
3767− (This is handy for reading web pages formatted using MathJax,
3768− for example.)
5624+`link-citations`
5625+: If true, citations will be
5626+ hyperlinked to the corresponding bibliography entries
5627+ (for author-date and numerical styles only).
37695628
3770−Producing slide shows with pandoc
3771−=================================
5629+`lang`
5630+: The `lang` field will affect how the style is localized,
5631+ for example in the translation of labels, the use
5632+ of quotation marks, and the way items are sorted.
5633+ (For backwards compatibility, `locale` may be used instead
5634+ of `lang`, but this use is deprecated.)
5635+
5636+ A BCP 47 language tag is expected: for example, `en`,
5637+ `de`, `en-US`, `fr-CA`, `ug-Cyrl`. The unicode extension
5638+ syntax (after `-u-`) may be used to specify options for
5639+ collation (sorting) more precisely. Here are some examples:
5640+
5641+ - `zh-u-co-pinyin` -- Chinese with the Pinyin collation.
5642+ - `es-u-co-trad` -- Spanish with the traditional collation
5643+ (with `Ch` sorting after `C`).
5644+ - `fr-u-kb` -- French with "backwards" accent sorting
5645+ (with `coté` sorting after `côte`).
5646+ - `en-US-u-kf-upper` -- English with uppercase letters sorting
5647+ before lower (default is lower before upper).
5648+
5649+`notes-after-punctuation`
5650+: If true (the default), pandoc will put footnote citations
5651+ after following punctuation. For example, if the source
5652+ contains `blah blah [@jones99].`, the result will look like
5653+ `blah blah.[^1]`, with the note moved after the period and
5654+ the space collapsed. If false, the space will still be
5655+ collapsed, but the footnote will not be moved after the
5656+ punctuation.
5657+
5658+
5659+# Slide shows
37725660
37735661You can use pandoc to produce an HTML + JavaScript slide presentation
37745662that can be viewed via a web browser. There are five ways to do this,
37755663using [S5], [DZSlides], [Slidy], [Slideous], or [reveal.js].
3776−You can also produce a PDF slide show using LaTeX [`beamer`].
5664+You can also produce a PDF slide show using LaTeX [`beamer`], or
5665+slides shows in Microsoft [PowerPoint] format.
37775666
37785667Here's the Markdown source for a simple slide show, `habits.txt`:
37795668
@@ -3815,18 +5704,21 @@ To produce an HTML/JavaScript slide show, simply type
38155704
38165705where `FORMAT` is either `s5`, `slidy`, `slideous`, `dzslides`, or `revealjs`.
38175706
3818−For Slidy, Slideous, reveal.js, and S5, the file produced by pandoc with the
3819−`-s/--standalone` option embeds a link to JavaScript and CSS files, which are
3820−assumed to be available at the relative path `s5/default` (for S5), `slideous`
3821−(for Slideous), `reveal.js` (for reveal.js), or at the Slidy website at
3822−`w3.org` (for Slidy). (These paths can be changed by setting the `slidy-url`,
3823−`slideous-url`, `revealjs-url`, or `s5-url` variables; see [Variables for slides],
3824−above.) For DZSlides, the (relatively short) JavaScript and CSS are included in
3825−the file by default.
3826−
3827−With all HTML slide formats, the `--self-contained` option can be used to
3828−produce a single file that contains all of the data necessary to display the
3829−slide show, including linked scripts, stylesheets, images, and videos.
5707+For Slidy, Slideous, reveal.js, and S5, the file produced by
5708+pandoc with the `-s/--standalone` option embeds a link to
5709+JavaScript and CSS files, which are assumed to be available at
5710+the relative path `s5/default` (for S5), `slideous` (for
5711+Slideous), `reveal.js` (for reveal.js), or at the Slidy website
5712+at `w3.org` (for Slidy). (These paths can be changed by setting
5713+the `slidy-url`, `slideous-url`, `revealjs-url`, or `s5-url`
5714+variables; see [Variables for HTML slides], above.) For
5715+DZSlides, the (relatively short) JavaScript and CSS are included
5716+in the file by default.
5717+
5718+With all HTML slide formats, the `--self-contained` option can
5719+be used to produce a single file that contains all of the data
5720+necessary to display the slide show, including linked scripts,
5721+stylesheets, images, and videos.
38305722
38315723To produce a PDF slide show using beamer, type
38325724
@@ -3835,14 +5727,17 @@ To produce a PDF slide show using beamer, type
38355727Note that a reveal.js slide show can also be converted to a PDF
38365728by printing it to a file from the browser.
38375729
3838−Structuring the slide show
3839−--------------------------
5730+To produce a Powerpoint slide show, type
38405731
3841−By default, the *slide level* is the highest header level in
5732+ pandoc habits.txt -o habits.pptx
5733+
5734+## Structuring the slide show
5735+
5736+By default, the *slide level* is the highest heading level in
38425737the hierarchy that is followed immediately by content, and not another
3843−header, somewhere in the document. In the example above, level 1 headers
3844−are always followed by level 2 headers, which are followed by content,
3845−so 2 is the slide level. This default can be overridden using
5738+heading, somewhere in the document. In the example above, level-1 headings
5739+are always followed by level-2 headings, which are followed by content,
5740+so the slide level is 2. This default can be overridden using
38465741the `--slide-level` option.
38475742
38485743The document is carved up into slides according to the following
@@ -3850,17 +5745,21 @@ rules:
38505745
38515746 * A horizontal rule always starts a new slide.
38525747
3853− * A header at the slide level always starts a new slide.
5748+ * A heading at the slide level always starts a new slide.
38545749
3855− * Headers *below* the slide level in the hierarchy create
3856− headers *within* a slide.
5750+ * Headings *below* the slide level in the hierarchy create
5751+ headings *within* a slide. (In beamer, a "block" will be
5752+ created. If the heading has the class `example`, an
5753+ `exampleblock` environment will be used; if it has the class
5754+ `alert`, an `alertblock` will be used; otherwise a regular
5755+ `block` will be used.)
38575756
3858− * Headers *above* the slide level in the hierarchy create
5757+ * Headings *above* the slide level in the hierarchy create
38595758 "title slides," which just contain the section title
38605759 and help to break the slide show into sections.
3861−
3862− * Content *above* the slide level will not appear in the slide
3863− show.
5760+ Non-slide content under these headings will be included
5761+ on the title slide (for HTML slide shows) or in a
5762+ subsequent slide with the same title (for beamer).
38645763
38655764 * A title page is constructed automatically from the document's title
38665765 block, if present. (In the case of beamer, this can be disabled
@@ -3868,32 +5767,57 @@ rules:
38685767
38695768These rules are designed to support many different styles of slide show. If
38705769you don't care about structuring your slides into sections and subsections,
3871−you can just use level 1 headers for all each slide. (In that case, level 1
5770+you can just use level-1 headings for all each slide. (In that case, level-1
38725771will be the slide level.) But you can also structure the slide show into
38735772sections, as in the example above.
38745773
38755774Note: in reveal.js slide shows, if slide level is 2, a two-dimensional
3876−layout will be produced, with level 1 headers building horizontally
3877−and level 2 headers building vertically. It is not recommended that
5775+layout will be produced, with level-1 headings building horizontally
5776+and level-2 headings building vertically. It is not recommended that
38785777you use deeper nesting of section levels with reveal.js.
38795778
3880−Incremental lists
3881−-----------------
5779+## Incremental lists
38825780
38835781By default, these writers produce lists that display "all at once."
38845782If you want your lists to display incrementally (one item at a time),
38855783use the `-i` option. If you want a particular list to depart from the
3886−default (that is, to display incrementally without the `-i` option and
3887−all at once with the `-i` option), put it in a block quote:
5784+default, put it in a `div` block with class `incremental` or
5785+`nonincremental`. So, for example, using the `fenced div` syntax, the
5786+following would be incremental regardless of the document default:
5787+
5788+ ::: incremental
5789+
5790+ - Eat spaghetti
5791+ - Drink wine
5792+
5793+ :::
5794+
5795+or
5796+
5797+ ::: nonincremental
5798+
5799+ - Eat spaghetti
5800+ - Drink wine
5801+
5802+ :::
5803+
5804+While using `incremental` and `nonincremental` divs are the
5805+recommended method of setting incremental lists on a per-case basis,
5806+an older method is also supported: putting lists inside a blockquote
5807+will depart from the document default (that is, it will display
5808+incrementally without the `-i` option and all at once with the `-i`
5809+option):
38885810
38895811 > - Eat spaghetti
38905812 > - Drink wine
38915813
3892−In this way incremental and nonincremental lists can be mixed in
3893−a single document.
5814+Both methods allow incremental and nonincremental lists to be mixed
5815+in a single document.
38945816
3895−Inserting pauses
3896−----------------
5817+Note: Neither the `-i/--incremental` option nor any of the
5818+methods described here currently works for PowerPoint output.
5819+
5820+## Inserting pauses
38975821
38985822You can add "pauses" within a slide by including a paragraph containing
38995823three dots, separated by spaces:
@@ -3906,8 +5830,9 @@ three dots, separated by spaces:
39065830
39075831 content after the pause
39085832
3909−Styling the slides
3910−------------------
5833+Note: this feature is not yet implemented for PowerPoint output.
5834+
5835+## Styling the slides
39115836
39125837You can change the style of HTML slides by putting customized CSS files
39135838in `$DATADIR/s5/default` (for S5), `$DATADIR/slidy` (for Slidy),
@@ -3932,9 +5857,9 @@ To style beamer slides, you can specify a `theme`, `colortheme`,
39325857
39335858 pandoc -t beamer habits.txt -V theme:Warsaw -o habits.pdf
39345859
3935−Note that header attributes will turn into slide attributes
5860+Note that heading attributes will turn into slide attributes
39365861(on a `<div>` or `<section>`) in HTML slide formats, allowing you
3937−to style individual slides. In beamer, the only header attribute
5862+to style individual slides. In beamer, the only heading attribute
39385863that affects slides is the `allowframebreaks` class, which sets the
39395864`allowframebreaks` option, causing multiple slides to be created
39405865if the content overfills the frame. This is recommended especially for
@@ -3942,30 +5867,82 @@ bibliographies:
39425867
39435868 # References {.allowframebreaks}
39445869
3945−Speaker notes
3946−-------------
5870+## Speaker notes
39475871
3948−reveal.js has good support for speaker notes. You can add notes to your
3949−Markdown document thus:
5872+Speaker notes are supported in reveal.js and PowerPoint (pptx)
5873+output. You can add notes to your Markdown document thus:
5874+
5875+ ::: notes
39505876
3951− <div class="notes">
39525877 This is my note.
39535878
39545879 - It can contain Markdown
39555880 - like this list
39565881
3957− </div>
5882+ :::
5883+
5884+To show the notes window in reveal.js, press `s` while viewing the
5885+presentation. Speaker notes in PowerPoint will be available, as usual,
5886+in handouts and presenter view.
39585887
3959−To show the notes window, press `s` while viewing the presentation.
39605888Notes are not yet supported for other slide formats, but the notes
39615889will not appear on the slides themselves.
39625890
3963−Frame attributes in beamer
3964−--------------------------
5891+## Columns
5892+
5893+To put material in side by side columns, you can use a native
5894+div container with class `columns`, containing two or more div
5895+containers with class `column` and a `width` attribute:
5896+
5897+ :::::::::::::: {.columns}
5898+ ::: {.column width="40%"}
5899+ contents...
5900+ :::
5901+ ::: {.column width="60%"}
5902+ contents...
5903+ :::
5904+ ::::::::::::::
5905+
5906+### Additional columns attributes in beamer
5907+
5908+The div containers with classes `columns` and `column` can optionally have
5909+an `align` attribute.
5910+The class `columns` can optionally have a `totalwidth` attribute or an
5911+`onlytextwidth` class.
5912+
5913+ :::::::::::::: {.columns align=center totalwidth=8em}
5914+ ::: {.column width="40%"}
5915+ contents...
5916+ :::
5917+ ::: {.column width="60%" align=bottom}
5918+ contents...
5919+ :::
5920+ ::::::::::::::
5921+
5922+The `align` attributes on `columns` and `column` can be used with the
5923+values `top`, `top-baseline`, `center` and `bottom` to vertically align
5924+the columns. It defaults to `top` in `columns`.
5925+
5926+The `totalwidth` attribute limits the width of the columns to the given value.
5927+
5928+ :::::::::::::: {.columns align=top .onlytextwidth}
5929+ ::: {.column width="40%" align=center}
5930+ contents...
5931+ :::
5932+ ::: {.column width="60%"}
5933+ contents...
5934+ :::
5935+ ::::::::::::::
5936+
5937+The class `onlytextwidth` sets the `totalwidth` to `\textwidth`.
5938+
5939+See Section 12.7 of the [Beamer User's Guide] for more details.
5940+
5941+## Frame attributes in beamer
39655942
39665943Sometimes it is necessary to add the LaTeX `[fragile]` option to
39675944a frame in beamer (for example, when using the `minted` environment).
3968−This can be forced by adding the `fragile` class to the header
5945+This can be forced by adding the `fragile` class to the heading
39695946introducing the slide:
39705947
39715948 # Fragile slide {.fragile}
@@ -3973,13 +5950,64 @@ introducing the slide:
39735950All of the other frame attributes described in Section 8.1 of
39745951the [Beamer User's Guide] may also be used: `allowdisplaybreaks`,
39755952`allowframebreaks`, `b`, `c`, `t`, `environment`, `label`, `plain`,
3976−`shrink`.
5953+`shrink`, `standout`, `noframenumbering`.
5954+
5955+## Background in reveal.js and beamer
5956+
5957+Background images can be added to self-contained reveal.js slideshows and
5958+to beamer slideshows.
5959+
5960+For the same image on every slide, use the configuration
5961+option `background-image` either in the YAML metadata block
5962+or as a command-line variable. (There are no other options in
5963+beamer and the rest of this section concerns reveal.js slideshows.)
5964+
5965+For reveal.js, you can instead use the reveal.js-native option
5966+`parallaxBackgroundImage`. You can also set `parallaxBackgroundHorizontal`
5967+and `parallaxBackgroundVertical` the same way and must also set
5968+`parallaxBackgroundSize` to have your values take effect.
5969+
5970+To set an image for a particular reveal.js slide, add
5971+`{data-background-image="/path/to/image"}`
5972+to the first slide-level heading on the slide (which may even be empty).
5973+
5974+In reveal.js's overview mode, the parallaxBackgroundImage will show up
5975+only on the first slide.
5976+
5977+Other reveal.js background settings also work on individual slides, including
5978+`data-background-size`, `data-background-repeat`, `data-background-color`,
5979+`data-transition`, and `data-transition-speed`.
5980+
5981+To add a background image to the automatically generated title slide, use the
5982+`title-slide-attributes` variable in the YAML metadata block. It must contain
5983+a map of attribute names and values.
5984+
5985+See the [reveal.js documentation](https://revealjs.com/backgrounds/) for more
5986+details.
5987+
5988+For example in reveal.js:
5989+
5990+```
5991+---
5992+title: My Slideshow
5993+parallaxBackgroundImage: /path/to/my/background_image.png
5994+title-slide-attributes:
5995+ data-background-image: /path/to/title_image.png
5996+ data-background-size: contain
5997+---
5998+
5999+## Slide One
6000+
6001+Slide 1 has background_image.png as its background.
6002+
6003+## {data-background-image="/path/to/special_image.jpg"}
6004+
6005+Slide 2 has a special image for its background, even though the heading has no content.
6006+```
39776007
3978−Creating EPUBs with pandoc
3979−==========================
6008+# EPUBs
39806009
3981−EPUB Metadata
3982−-------------
6010+## EPUB Metadata
39836011
39846012EPUB metadata may be specified using the `--epub-metadata` option, but
39856013if the source document is Markdown, it is better to use a [YAML metadata
@@ -4001,6 +6029,8 @@ block][Extension: `yaml_metadata_block`]. Here is an example:
40016029 text: doi:10.234234.234/33
40026030 publisher: My Press
40036031 rights: © 2007 John Smith, CC BY-NC
6032+ ibooks:
6033+ version: 1.3.4
40046034 ...
40056035
40066036The following fields are recognized:
@@ -4055,94 +6085,230 @@ The following fields are recognized:
40556085
40566086`rights`
40576087 ~ A string value.
6088+
6089+`belongs-to-collection`
6090+ ~ A string value. identifies the name of a collection to which
6091+ the EPUB Publication belongs.
6092+
6093+`group-position`
6094+ ~ The `group-position` field indicates the numeric position in which
6095+ the EPUB Publication belongs relative to other works belonging to
6096+ the same `belongs-to-collection` field.
40586097
40596098`cover-image`
40606099 ~ A string value (path to cover image).
40616100
4062−`stylesheet`
6101+`css` (or legacy: `stylesheet`)
40636102 ~ A string value (path to CSS stylesheet).
40646103
40656104`page-progression-direction`
40666105 ~ Either `ltr` or `rtl`. Specifies the `page-progression-direction`
40676106 attribute for the [`spine` element].
40686107
4069−[MARC relators]: http://loc.gov/marc/relators/relaterm.html
4070−[`spine` element]: http://idpf.org/epub/301/spec/epub-publications.html#sec-spine-elem
6108+`ibooks`
6109+ ~ iBooks-specific metadata, with the following fields:
40716110
4072−Linked media
4073−------------
6111+ - `version`: (string)
6112+ - `specified-fonts`: `true`|`false` (default `false`)
6113+ - `ipad-orientation-lock`: `portrait-only`|`landscape-only`
6114+ - `iphone-orientation-lock`: `portrait-only`|`landscape-only`
6115+ - `binding`: `true`|`false` (default `true`)
6116+ - `scroll-axis`: `vertical`|`horizontal`|`default`
6117+
6118+[MARC relators]: https://loc.gov/marc/relators/relaterm.html
6119+[`spine` element]: http://idpf.org/epub/301/spec/epub-publications.html#sec-spine-elem
40746120
4075−By default, pandoc will download linked media (including audio and
4076−video) and include it in the EPUB container, yielding a completely
6121+## The `epub:type` attribute
6122+
6123+For `epub3` output, you can mark up the heading that corresponds to an EPUB
6124+chapter using the [`epub:type` attribute][epub-type]. For example, to set
6125+the attribute to the value `prologue`, use this markdown:
6126+
6127+ # My chapter {epub:type=prologue}
6128+
6129+Which will result in:
6130+
6131+ <body epub:type="frontmatter">
6132+ <section epub:type="prologue">
6133+ <h1>My chapter</h1>
6134+
6135+Pandoc will output `<body epub:type="bodymatter">`, unless
6136+you use one of the following values, in which case either
6137+`frontmatter` or `backmatter` will be output.
6138+
6139+`epub:type` of first section `epub:type` of body
6140+---------------------------- ------------------
6141+prologue frontmatter
6142+abstract frontmatter
6143+acknowledgments frontmatter
6144+copyright-page frontmatter
6145+dedication frontmatter
6146+credits frontmatter
6147+keywords frontmatter
6148+imprint frontmatter
6149+contributors frontmatter
6150+other-credits frontmatter
6151+errata frontmatter
6152+revision-history frontmatter
6153+titlepage frontmatter
6154+halftitlepage frontmatter
6155+seriespage frontmatter
6156+foreword frontmatter
6157+preface frontmatter
6158+appendix backmatter
6159+colophon backmatter
6160+bibliography backmatter
6161+index backmatter
6162+
6163+[epub-type]: http://www.idpf.org/epub/31/spec/epub-contentdocs.html#sec-epub-type-attribute
6164+
6165+## Linked media
6166+
6167+By default, pandoc will download media referenced from any `<img>`, `<audio>`,
6168+`<video>` or `<source>` element present in the generated EPUB,
6169+and include it in the EPUB container, yielding a completely
40776170self-contained EPUB. If you want to link to external media resources
40786171instead, use raw HTML in your source and add `data-external="1"` to the tag
40796172with the `src` attribute. For example:
40806173
40816174 <audio controls="1">
4082− <source src="http://example.com/music/toccata.mp3"
6175+ <source src="https://example.com/music/toccata.mp3"
40836176 data-external="1" type="audio/mpeg">
40846177 </source>
40856178 </audio>
40866179
4087−Literate Haskell support
4088−========================
4089−
4090−If you append `+lhs` (or `+literate_haskell`) to an appropriate input or output
4091−format (`markdown`, `markdown_strict`, `rst`, or `latex` for input or output;
4092−`beamer`, `html4` or `html5` for output only), pandoc will treat the document as
4093−literate Haskell source. This means that
4094−
4095− - In Markdown input, "bird track" sections will be parsed as Haskell
4096− code rather than block quotations. Text between `\begin{code}`
4097− and `\end{code}` will also be treated as Haskell code. For
4098− ATX-style headers the character '=' will be used instead of '#'.
4099−
4100− - In Markdown output, code blocks with classes `haskell` and `literate`
4101− will be rendered using bird tracks, and block quotations will be
4102− indented one space, so they will not be treated as Haskell code.
4103− In addition, headers will be rendered setext-style (with underlines)
4104− rather than ATX-style (with '#' characters). (This is because ghc
4105− treats '#' characters in column 1 as introducing line numbers.)
4106−
4107− - In restructured text input, "bird track" sections will be parsed
4108− as Haskell code.
4109−
4110− - In restructured text output, code blocks with class `haskell` will
4111− be rendered using bird tracks.
6180+# Jupyter notebooks
6181+
6182+When creating a [Jupyter notebook], pandoc will try to infer the
6183+notebook structure. Code blocks with the class `code` will be
6184+taken as code cells, and intervening content will be taken as
6185+Markdown cells. Attachments will automatically be created for
6186+images in Markdown cells. Metadata will be taken from the
6187+`jupyter` metadata field. For example:
6188+
6189+````
6190+---
6191+title: My notebook
6192+jupyter:
6193+ nbformat: 4
6194+ nbformat_minor: 5
6195+ kernelspec:
6196+ display_name: Python 2
6197+ language: python
6198+ name: python2
6199+ language_info:
6200+ codemirror_mode:
6201+ name: ipython
6202+ version: 2
6203+ file_extension: ".py"
6204+ mimetype: "text/x-python"
6205+ name: "python"
6206+ nbconvert_exporter: "python"
6207+ pygments_lexer: "ipython2"
6208+ version: "2.7.15"
6209+---
6210+
6211+# Lorem ipsum
6212+
6213+**Lorem ipsum** dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Nunc luctus
6214+bibendum felis dictum sodales.
6215+
6216+``` code
6217+print("hello")
6218+```
41126219
4113− - In LaTeX input, text in `code` environments will be parsed as
4114− Haskell code.
6220+## Pyout
41156221
4116− - In LaTeX output, code blocks with class `haskell` will be rendered
4117− inside `code` environments.
6222+``` code
6223+from IPython.display import HTML
6224+HTML("""
6225+<script>
6226+console.log("hello");
6227+</script>
6228+<b>HTML</b>
6229+""")
6230+```
41186231
4119− - In HTML output, code blocks with class `haskell` will be rendered
4120− with class `literatehaskell` and bird tracks.
6232+## Image
41216233
4122−Examples:
6234+This image  will be
6235+included as a cell attachment.
6236+````
41236237
4124− pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html
6238+If you want to add cell attributes, group cells differently, or
6239+add output to code cells, then you need to include divs to
6240+indicate the structure. You can use either [fenced
6241+divs][Extension: `fenced_divs`] or [native divs][Extension:
6242+`native_divs`] for this. Here is an example:
41256243
4126−reads literate Haskell source formatted with Markdown conventions and writes
4127−ordinary HTML (without bird tracks).
6244+````
6245+:::::: {.cell .markdown}
6246+# Lorem
41286247
4129− pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html+lhs
6248+**Lorem ipsum** dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Nunc luctus
6249+bibendum felis dictum sodales.
6250+::::::
41306251
4131−writes HTML with the Haskell code in bird tracks, so it can be copied
4132−and pasted as literate Haskell source.
6252+:::::: {.cell .code execution_count=1}
6253+``` {.python}
6254+print("hello")
6255+```
41336256
4134−Note that GHC expects the bird tracks in the first column, so indentend literate
4135−code blocks (e.g. inside an itemized environment) will not be picked up by the
4136−Haskell compiler.
6257+::: {.output .stream .stdout}
6258+```
6259+hello
6260+```
6261+:::
6262+::::::
6263+
6264+:::::: {.cell .code execution_count=2}
6265+``` {.python}
6266+from IPython.display import HTML
6267+HTML("""
6268+<script>
6269+console.log("hello");
6270+</script>
6271+<b>HTML</b>
6272+""")
6273+```
41376274
4138−Syntax highlighting
4139−===================
6275+::: {.output .execute_result execution_count=2}
6276+```{=html}
6277+<script>
6278+console.log("hello");
6279+</script>
6280+<b>HTML</b>
6281+hello
6282+```
6283+:::
6284+::::::
6285+````
6286+
6287+If you include raw HTML or TeX in an output cell, use the
6288+[raw attribute][Extension: `fenced_attribute`], as shown
6289+in the last cell of the example above. Although pandoc can
6290+process "bare" raw HTML and TeX, the result is often
6291+interspersed raw elements and normal textual elements, and
6292+in an output cell pandoc expects a single, connected raw
6293+block. To avoid using raw HTML or TeX except when
6294+marked explicitly using raw attributes, we recommend
6295+specifying the extensions `-raw_html-raw_tex+raw_attribute` when
6296+translating between Markdown and ipynb notebooks.
6297+
6298+Note that options and extensions that affect reading and
6299+writing of Markdown will also affect Markdown cells in ipynb
6300+notebooks. For example, `--wrap=preserve` will preserve
6301+soft line breaks in Markdown cells; `--atx-headers` will
6302+cause ATX-style headings to be used; and `--preserve-tabs` will
6303+prevent tabs from being turned to spaces.
6304+
6305+# Syntax highlighting
41406306
41416307Pandoc will automatically highlight syntax in [fenced code blocks] that
41426308are marked with a language name. The Haskell library [skylighting] is
4143−used for highlighting, which works in HTML, Docx, Ms, and LaTeX/PDF output.
4144−To see a list of language names that pandoc will recognize, type
4145−`pandoc --list-highlight-languages`.
6309+used for highlighting. Currently highlighting is supported only for
6310+HTML, EPUB, Docx, Ms, and LaTeX/PDF output. To see a list of language names
6311+that pandoc will recognize, type `pandoc --list-highlight-languages`.
41466312
41476313The color scheme can be selected using the `--highlight-style` option.
41486314The default color scheme is `pygments`, which imitates the default color
@@ -4150,15 +6316,36 @@ scheme used by the Python library pygments (though pygments is not actually
41506316used to do the highlighting). To see a list of highlight styles,
41516317type `pandoc --list-highlight-styles`.
41526318
6319+If you are not satisfied with the predefined styles, you can
6320+use `--print-highlight-style` to generate a JSON `.theme` file which
6321+can be modified and used as the argument to `--highlight-style`. To
6322+get a JSON version of the `pygments` style, for example:
6323+
6324+ pandoc --print-highlight-style pygments > my.theme
6325+
6326+Then edit `my.theme` and use it like this:
6327+
6328+ pandoc --highlight-style my.theme
6329+
6330+If you are not satisfied with the built-in highlighting, or you
6331+want highlight a language that isn't supported, you can use the
6332+`--syntax-definition` option to load a [KDE-style XML syntax definition
6333+file](https://docs.kde.org/stable5/en/kate/katepart/highlight.html).
6334+Before writing your own, have a look at KDE's [repository of syntax
6335+definitions](https://github.com/KDE/syntax-highlighting/tree/master/data/syntax).
6336+
41536337To disable highlighting, use the `--no-highlight` option.
41546338
41556339[skylighting]: https://github.com/jgm/skylighting
41566340
4157−Custom Styles in Docx Output
4158−============================
6341+# Custom Styles
6342+
6343+Custom styles can be used in the docx and ICML formats.
6344+
6345+## Output
41596346
4160−By default, pandoc's docx output applies a predefined set of styles for
4161−blocks such as paragraphs and block quotes, and uses largely default
6347+By default, pandoc's docx and ICML output applies a predefined set of styles
6348+for blocks such as paragraphs and block quotes, and uses largely default
41626349formatting (italics, bold) for inlines. This will work for most
41636350purposes, especially alongside a `reference.docx` file. However, if you
41646351need to apply your own styles to blocks, or match a preexisting set of
@@ -4166,26 +6353,28 @@ styles, pandoc allows you to define custom styles for blocks and text
41666353using `div`s and `span`s, respectively.
41676354
41686355If you define a `div` or `span` with the attribute `custom-style`,
4169−pandoc will apply your specified style to the contained elements. So,
4170−for example,
6356+pandoc will apply your specified style to the contained elements (with
6357+the exception of elements whose function depends on a style, like
6358+headings, code blocks, block quotes, or links). So, for example, using
6359+the `bracketed_spans` syntax,
41716360
4172− <span custom-style="Emphatically">Get out,</span> he said.
6361+ [Get out]{custom-style="Emphatically"}, he said.
41736362
4174−would produce a docx file with "Get out," styled with character
4175−style `Emphatically`. Similarly,
6363+would produce a docx file with "Get out" styled with character
6364+style `Emphatically`. Similarly, using the `fenced_divs` syntax,
41766365
41776366 Dickinson starts the poem simply:
41786367
4179− <div custom-style="Poetry">
6368+ ::: {custom-style="Poetry"}
41806369 | A Bird came down the Walk---
41816370 | He did not know I saw---
4182− </div>
6371+ :::
41836372
41846373would style the two contained lines with the `Poetry` paragraph style.
41856374
4186−If the styles are not yet in your reference.docx, they will be defined
4187−in the output file as inheriting from normal text. If they are already
4188−defined, pandoc will not alter the definition.
6375+For docx output, styles will be defined in the output file as inheriting
6376+from normal text, if the styles are not yet in your reference.docx.
6377+If they are already defined, pandoc will not alter the definition.
41896378
41906379This feature allows for greatest customization in conjunction with
41916380[pandoc filters]. If you want all paragraphs after block quotes to be
@@ -4195,206 +6384,137 @@ want all italics to be transformed to the `Emphasis` character style
41956384transform all italicized inlines to inlines within an `Emphasis`
41966385custom-style `span`.
41976386
4198−[pandoc filters]: http://pandoc.org/scripting.html
6387+For docx output, you don't need to enable any extensions for
6388+custom styles to work.
6389+
6390+[pandoc filters]: https://pandoc.org/filters.html
6391+
6392+## Input
6393+
6394+The docx reader, by default, only reads those styles that it can
6395+convert into pandoc elements, either by direct conversion or
6396+interpreting the derivation of the input document's styles.
6397+
6398+By enabling the [`styles` extension](#ext-styles) in the docx reader
6399+(`-f docx+styles`), you can produce output that maintains the styles
6400+of the input document, using the `custom-style` class. Paragraph
6401+styles are interpreted as divs, while character styles are interpreted
6402+as spans.
6403+
6404+For example, using the `custom-style-reference.docx` file in the test
6405+directory, we have the following different outputs:
6406+
6407+Without the `+styles` extension:
6408+
6409+ $ pandoc test/docx/custom-style-reference.docx -f docx -t markdown
6410+ This is some text.
6411+
6412+ This is text with an *emphasized* text style. And this is text with a
6413+ **strengthened** text style.
6414+
6415+ > Here is a styled paragraph that inherits from Block Text.
6416+
6417+And with the extension:
6418+
6419+ $ pandoc test/docx/custom-style-reference.docx -f docx+styles -t markdown
6420+
6421+ ::: {custom-style="First Paragraph"}
6422+ This is some text.
6423+ :::
6424+
6425+ ::: {custom-style="Body Text"}
6426+ This is text with an [emphasized]{custom-style="Emphatic"} text style.
6427+ And this is text with a [strengthened]{custom-style="Strengthened"}
6428+ text style.
6429+ :::
6430+
6431+ ::: {custom-style="My Block Style"}
6432+ > Here is a styled paragraph that inherits from Block Text.
6433+ :::
6434+
6435+With these custom styles, you can use your input document as a
6436+reference-doc while creating docx output (see below), and maintain the
6437+same styles in your input and output files.
41996438
4200−Custom writers
4201−==============
6439+# Custom writers
42026440
4203−Pandoc can be extended with custom writers written in [lua]. (Pandoc
4204−includes a lua interpreter, so lua need not be installed separately.)
6441+Pandoc can be extended with custom writers written in [Lua]. (Pandoc
6442+includes a Lua interpreter, so Lua need not be installed separately.)
42056443
4206−To use a custom writer, simply specify the path to the lua script
6444+To use a custom writer, simply specify the path to the Lua script
42076445in place of the output format. For example:
42086446
42096447 pandoc -t data/sample.lua
42106448
4211−Creating a custom writer requires writing a lua function for each
6449+Creating a custom writer requires writing a Lua function for each
42126450possible element in a pandoc document. To get a documented example
42136451which you can modify according to your needs, do
42146452
42156453 pandoc --print-default-data-file sample.lua
42166454
4217−[lua]: http://www.lua.org
4218−
4219−Authors
4220−=======
4221−
4222−© 2006-2017 John MacFarlane (jgm@berkeley.edu). Released under the
4223−[GPL], version 2 or greater. This software carries no warranty of
4224−any kind. (See COPYRIGHT for full copyright and warranty notices.)
4225−
4226−Contributors include
4227−Arata Mizuki,
4228−Aaron Wolen,
4229−Albert Krewinkel,
4230−Alex Ivkin,
4231−Alex Vong,
4232−Alexander Kondratskiy,
4233−Alexander Sulfrian,
4234−Alexander V Vershilov,
4235−Alfred Wechselberger,
4236−Andreas Lööw,
4237−Andrew Dunning,
4238−Antoine Latter,
4239−Arata Mizuki,
4240−Arlo O'Keeffe,
4241−Artyom Kazak,
4242−B. Scott Michel,
4243−Ben Gamari,
4244−Beni Cherniavsky-Paskin,
4245−Benoit Schweblin,
4246−Bjorn Buckwalter,
4247−Bradley Kuhn,
4248−Brent Yorgey,
4249−Bryan O'Sullivan,
4250−Caleb McDaniel,
4251−Calvin Beck,
4252−Carlos Sosa,
4253−Chris Black,
4254−Christian Conkle,
4255−Christoffer Ackelman,
4256−Christoffer Sawicki,
4257−Clare Macrae,
4258−Clint Adams,
4259−Conal Elliott,
4260−Craig S. Bosma,
4261−Daniel Bergey,
4262−Daniel T. Staal,
4263−Daniele D'Orazio,
4264−David Lazar,
4265−David Röthlisberger,
4266−Denis Laxalde,
4267−Douglas Calvert,
4268−Emanuel Evans,
4269−Emily Eisenberg,
4270−Eric Kow,
4271−Eric Seidel,
4272−Felix Yan,
4273−Florian Eitel,
4274−François Gannaz,
4275−Freiric Barral,
4276−Freirich Raabe,
4277−Frerich Raabe,
4278−Fyodor Sheremetyev,
4279−Gabor Pali,
4280−Gavin Beatty,
4281−Gottfried Haider,
4282−Greg Maslov,
4283−Greg Rundlett,
4284−Grégory Bataille,
4285−Gwern Branwen,
4286−Hans-Peter Deifel,
4287−Henrik Tramberend,
4288−Henry de Valence,
4289−Hubert Plociniczak,
4290−Ilya V. Portnov,
4291−Ivo Clarysse,
4292−J. Lewis Muir,
4293−Jaime Marquínez Ferrándiz,
4294−Jakob Voß,
4295−James Aspnes,
4296−Jamie F. Olson,
4297−Jan Larres,
4298−Jan Schulz,
4299−Jason Ronallo,
4300−Jeff Arnold,
4301−Jeff Runningen,
4302−Jens Petersen,
4303−Jesse Rosenthal,
4304−Joe Hillenbrand,
4305−John MacFarlane,
4306−John Muccigrosso,
4307−Jonas Smedegaard,
4308−Jonathan Daugherty,
4309−Jose Luis Duran,
4310−Josef Svenningsson,
4311−Julien Cretel,
4312−Juliusz Gonera,
4313−Justin Bogner,
4314−Jérémy Bobbio,
4315−Kelsey Hightower,
4316−Kolen Cheung,
4317−Konstantin Zudov,
4318−Kristof Bastiaensen,
4319−Lars-Dominik Braun,
4320−Luke Plant,
4321−Mark Szepieniec,
4322−Mark Wright,
4323−Martin Linn,
4324−Masayoshi Takahashi,
4325−Matej Kollar,
4326−Mathias Schenner,
4327−Mathieu Duponchelle,
4328−Matthew Eddey,
4329−Matthew Pickering,
4330−Matthias C. M. Troffaes,
4331−Mauro Bieg,
4332−Max Bolingbroke,
4333−Max Rydahl Andersen,
4334−Merijn Verstraaten,
4335−Michael Beaumont,
4336−Michael Chladek,
4337−Michael Snoyman,
4338−Michael Thompson,
4339−MinRK,
4340−Morton Fox,
4341−Nathan Gass,
4342−Neil Mayhew,
4343−Nick Bart,
4344−Nicolas Kaiser,
4345−Nikolay Yakimov,
4346−Oliver Matthews,
4347−Ophir Lifshitz,
4348−Pablo Rodríguez,
4349−Paul Rivier,
4350−Paulo Tanimoto,
4351−Peter Wang,
4352−Philippe Ombredanne,
4353−Phillip Alday,
4354−Prayag Verma,
4355−Puneeth Chaganti,
4356−Ralf Stephan,
4357−Raniere Silva,
4358−Recai Oktaş,
4359−RyanGlScott,
4360−Scott Morrison,
4361−Sergei Trofimovich,
4362−Sergey Astanin,
4363−Shahbaz Youssefi,
4364−Shaun Attfield,
4365−Sidarth Kapur,
4366−Sidharth Kapur,
4367−Simon Hengel,
4368−Sumit Sahrawat,
4369−Thomas Hodgson,
4370−Thomas Weißschuh,
4371−Tim Lin,
4372−Timothy Humphries,
4373−Tiziano Müller,
4374−Todd Sifleet,
4375−Tom Leese,
4376−Uli Köhler,
4377−Václav Zeman,
4378−Viktor Kronvall,
4379−Vincent,
4380−Václav Haisman,
4381−Václav Zeman,
4382−Wandmalfarbe,
4383−Waldir Pimenta,
4384−Wikiwide,
4385−Xavier Olive,
4386−bumper314,
4387−csforste,
4388−infinity0x,
4389−nkalvi,
4390−qerub,
4391−robabla,
4392−roblabla,
4393−rodja.trappe,
4394−rski,
4395−shreevatsa.public,
4396−takahashim,
4397−tgkokk,
4398−thsutton.
4399−
4400−[GPL]: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html "GNU General Public License"
6455+Note that custom writers have no default template. If you want
6456+to use `--standalone` with a custom writer, you will need to
6457+specify a template manually using `--template` or add a new
6458+default template with the name
6459+`default.NAME_OF_CUSTOM_WRITER.lua` to the `templates`
6460+subdirectory of your user data directory (see [Templates]).
6461+
6462+[Lua]: https://www.lua.org
6463+
6464+# Reproducible builds
6465+
6466+Some of the document formats pandoc targets (such as EPUB,
6467+docx, and ODT) include build timestamps in the generated document.
6468+That means that the files generated on successive builds will
6469+differ, even if the source does not. To avoid this, set the
6470+`SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH` environment variable, and the timestamp will
6471+be taken from it instead of the current time.
6472+`SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH` should contain an integer unix timestamp
6473+(specifying the number of second since midnight UTC January 1, 1970).
6474+
6475+Some document formats also include a unique identifier. For
6476+EPUB, this can be set explicitly by setting the `identifier`
6477+metadata field (see [EPUB Metadata], above).
6478+
6479+# A note on security
6480+
6481+If you use pandoc to convert user-contributed content in a web
6482+application, here are some things to keep in mind:
6483+
6484+1. Although pandoc itself will not create or modify any files other
6485+ than those you explicitly ask it create (with the exception
6486+ of temporary files used in producing PDFs), a filter or custom
6487+ writer could in principle do anything on your file system. Please
6488+ audit filters and custom writers very carefully before using them.
6489+
6490+2. If your application uses pandoc as a Haskell library (rather than
6491+ shelling out to the executable), it is possible to use it in a mode
6492+ that fully isolates pandoc from your file system, by running the
6493+ pandoc operations in the `PandocPure` monad. See the document
6494+ [Using the pandoc API](https://pandoc.org/using-the-pandoc-api.html)
6495+ for more details.
6496+
6497+3. Pandoc's parsers can exhibit pathological performance on some
6498+ corner cases. It is wise to put any pandoc operations under
6499+ a timeout, to avoid DOS attacks that exploit these issues.
6500+ If you are using the pandoc executable, you can add the
6501+ command line options `+RTS -M512M -RTS` (for example) to limit
6502+ the heap size to 512MB.
6503+
6504+4. The HTML generated by pandoc is not guaranteed to be safe.
6505+ If `raw_html` is enabled for the Markdown input, users can
6506+ inject arbitrary HTML. Even if `raw_html` is disabled,
6507+ users can include dangerous content in URLs and attributes.
6508+ To be safe, you should run all the generated HTML through
6509+ an HTML sanitizer.
6510+
6511+# Authors
6512+
6513+Copyright 2006--2021 John MacFarlane (jgm@berkeley.edu). Released
6514+under the [GPL], version 2 or greater. This software carries no
6515+warranty of any kind. (See COPYRIGHT for full copyright and
6516+warranty notices.) For a full list of contributors, see the file
6517+AUTHORS.md in the pandoc source code.
6518+
6519+[GPL]: https://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html "GNU General Public License"
6520+[YAML]: https://yaml.org/spec/1.2/spec.html "YAML v1.2 Spec"